Nikon D5500 Camera User Guide

Nikon D5500 Camera User Guide

DIGITAL CAMERA

Reference Manual

Nikon Manual Viewer 2

Install the Nikon Manual Viewer 2 app on your smartphone or tablet to view Nikon digital camera manuals, anytime, anywhere.

Nikon Manual Viewer 2 can be downloaded free of charge from the App Store and Google Play.

En

D5500

Model Name: N1405

To get the most from your camera, please be sure to read all instructions thoroughly and keep them where they will be read by all who use the product.

Symbols and Conventions

To make it easier to find the information you need, the following symbols and conventions are used:

D

This icon marks cautions; information that should be read before use to prevent damage to the camera.

A

This icon marks notes; information that should be read before using the camera.

0

This icon marks references to other pages in this manual.

Menu items, options, and messages displayed in the camera monitor are shown in bold.

Camera Settings

The explanations in this manual assume that default settings are used.

A For Your Safety

Before using the camera for the first time, read the safety instructions

in “For Your Safety” (

0 xi–xiv).

Table of Contents

For Your Safety............................................................................. xi

Notices .......................................................................................... xv

Wireless ........................................................................................ xx

Introduction

1

Getting to Know the Camera...................................................... 1

Camera Menus: An Overview ................................................... 13

Using the Touch Screen............................................................. 17

First Steps..................................................................................... 27

“Point-and-Shoot” Modes (

i and j)

38

Framing Photos in the Viewfinder .......................................... 39

Viewing Photographs ........................................................................ 42

Deleting Unwanted Pictures........................................................... 43

Framing Photos in the Monitor................................................ 45

Viewing Photographs ........................................................................ 48

Deleting Unwanted Pictures........................................................... 49

Recording Movies....................................................................... 50

Viewing Movies.................................................................................... 52

Deleting Unwanted Movies............................................................. 53

i

ii

Matching Settings to the Subject or Situation

(Scene Mode)

54

k Portrait........................................................................................ 55 l Landscape ................................................................................. 55 p Child ............................................................................................ 55

m Sports .......................................................................................... 56 n Close up...................................................................................... 56 o Night Portrait............................................................................ 56

r Night Landscape ..................................................................... 57 s Party/Indoor ............................................................................. 57 t Beach/Snow.............................................................................. 57

u Sunset ......................................................................................... 58 v Dusk/Dawn ............................................................................... 58 w Pet Portrait ................................................................................ 58

x Candlelight ................................................................................. 59 y Blossom ...................................................................................... 59 z Autumn Colors......................................................................... 59

0 Food.............................................................................................. 60

Special Effects

61

% Night Vision .............................................................................. 61

S Super Vivid................................................................................. 62

T Pop............................................................................................. 62

U Photo Illustration .................................................................... 62

' Toy Camera Effect ................................................................... 63

( Miniature Effect....................................................................... 63

3 Selective Color......................................................................... 63

1 Silhouette .................................................................................. 64

2 High Key..................................................................................... 64

3 Low Key ...................................................................................... 64

Options Available in Live View ....................................................... 66

More on Photography

71

Choosing a Release Mode......................................................... 71

Continuous Shooting (Burst Mode)........................................ 72

Quiet Shutter Release................................................................ 74

Self-Timer Mode ......................................................................... 75

Focus (Viewfinder Photography) ............................................ 78

Choosing How the Camera Focuses: Focus Mode.................. 78

Choosing How the Focus Point Is Selected:

AF-Area Mode.................................................................................. 82

Focus Point Selection........................................................................ 85

Focus Lock............................................................................................. 86

Manual Focus ....................................................................................... 88

Image Quality and Size ............................................................. 90

Image Quality....................................................................................... 90

Image Size ............................................................................................. 92

Using the Built-in Flash ............................................................. 93

Auto Pop-up Modes........................................................................... 93

Manual Pop-up Modes ..................................................................... 95

ISO Sensitivity ............................................................................. 99

Interval Timer Photography................................................... 101

Remote Control Photography ............................................... 107

Using an Optional ML-L3 Remote Control .............................. 107

Restoring Default Settings ..................................................... 110

P, S, A, and M Modes

113

Shutter Speed and Aperture.................................................. 113

Mode P (Programmed Auto)......................................................... 115

Mode S (Shutter-Priority Auto)..................................................... 117

Mode A (Aperture-Priority Auto) ................................................. 118

Mode M (Manual) .............................................................................. 119

Long Time-Exposures (M Mode Only)........................................ 121

iii

iv

Exposure.................................................................................... 125

Metering .............................................................................................. 125

Autoexposure Lock.......................................................................... 127

Exposure Compensation ............................................................... 129

Flash Compensation ....................................................................... 131

Preserving Detail in Highlights and Shadows.................... 133

Active D-Lighting ............................................................................. 133

High Dynamic Range (HDR) ......................................................... 135

White Balance........................................................................... 137

Fine-Tuning White Balance .......................................................... 140

Preset Manual.................................................................................... 142

Bracketing................................................................................. 148

Picture Controls ....................................................................... 152

Selecting a Picture Control ........................................................... 152

Modifying Picture Controls........................................................... 154

Creating Custom Picture Controls ............................................. 158

Sharing Custom Picture Controls ............................................... 161

Live View

162

Framing Photographs in the Monitor.................................. 162

Focusing in Live View ..................................................................... 164

The Live View Display ..................................................................... 168

Recording and Viewing Movies

174

Recording Movies.................................................................... 174

Movie Settings................................................................................... 177

Viewing Movies........................................................................ 181

Editing Movies ......................................................................... 183

Trimming Movies ............................................................................. 183

Saving Selected Frames ................................................................. 186

Playback and Deletion

188

Viewing Pictures....................................................................... 188

Full-Frame Playback......................................................................... 188

Thumbnail Playback ........................................................................ 190

Calendar Playback ............................................................................ 191

Photo Information ................................................................... 192

Taking a Closer Look: Playback Zoom.................................. 200

Protecting Photographs from Deletion ............................... 202

Rating Pictures.......................................................................... 203

Rating Individual Pictures.............................................................. 203

Rating Multiple Pictures ................................................................. 204

Deleting Photographs............................................................. 205

Full-Frame, Thumbnail, and Calendar Playback .................... 205

The Playback Menu.......................................................................... 206

Slide Shows ............................................................................... 208

Slide Show Options.......................................................................... 209

Connections

210

Installing ViewNX 2.................................................................. 210

Using ViewNX 2 ........................................................................ 211

Copy Pictures to the Computer................................................... 211

Printing Photographs.............................................................. 214

Connecting the Printer ................................................................... 214

Printing Pictures One at a Time ................................................... 215

Printing Multiple Pictures .............................................................. 216

Creating a DPOF Print Order: Print Set...................................... 218

Viewing Pictures on TV ........................................................... 220

Standard Definition Devices......................................................... 220

High-Definition Devices ................................................................. 222

v

vi

Wi-Fi

224

What Wi-Fi Can Do for You .................................................... 224

Accessing the Camera ............................................................ 225

WPS (Android Only)......................................................................... 226

PIN Entry (Android Only) ............................................................... 228

SSID (Android and iOS) .................................................................. 229

Selecting Pictures for Upload................................................ 231

Selecting Individual Pictures for Upload ................................. 231

Selecting Multiple Pictures for Upload..................................... 232

Camera Menus

233

D The Playback Menu: Managing Images ................................ 233

Playback Menu Options................................................................. 233

Playback Folder ......................................................................... 234

Playback Display Options ...................................................... 234

Image Review............................................................................. 234

Auto Image Rotation ............................................................... 235

Rotate Tall.................................................................................... 235

C The Shooting Menu: Shooting Options................................. 236

Shooting Menu Options ................................................................ 236

Reset Shooting Menu.............................................................. 237

Storage Folder ........................................................................... 238

File Naming................................................................................. 240

NEF (RAW) Recording .............................................................. 240

ISO Sensitivity Settings ........................................................... 241

Color Space ................................................................................. 243

Long Exposure NR .................................................................... 243

High ISO NR................................................................................. 244

Vignette Control........................................................................ 244

Auto Distortion Control.......................................................... 245

Optical VR .................................................................................... 245

A Custom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings........................ 246

Custom Settings................................................................................ 247

Reset Custom Settings ............................................................ 248 a: Autofocus ................................................................................... 248 a1: AF-C Priority Selection...................................................... 248

a2: Number of Focus Points................................................... 249

a3: Built-in AF-assist Illuminator .......................................... 250 a4: Rangefinder .......................................................................... 250

a5: Manual Focus Ring in AF Mode..................................... 251

b: Exposure ..................................................................................... 252 b1: EV Steps for Exposure Cntrl............................................ 252 b2: ISO Display............................................................................ 252 c: Timers/AE Lock ......................................................................... 252 c1: Shutter-Release Button AE-L .......................................... 252

c2: Auto off Timers.................................................................... 253

c3: Self-Timer .............................................................................. 254 c4: Remote on Duration (ML-L3).......................................... 254 d: Shooting/Display..................................................................... 254 d1: Exposure Delay Mode....................................................... 254

d2: File Number Sequence..................................................... 255

d3: Viewfinder Grid Display ................................................... 256 d4: Date Stamp........................................................................... 256

d5: Reverse Indicators.............................................................. 258

e: Bracketing/Flash ...................................................................... 259 e1: Flash Cntrl for Built-in Flash/Optional Flash ............. 259

e2: Auto Bracketing Set........................................................... 264

f: Controls........................................................................................ 265 f1: Assign Fn Button ................................................................. 265

f2: Assign AE-L/AF-L Button................................................... 267

f3: Assign Touch Fn................................................................... 268

f4: Reverse Dial Rotation......................................................... 269

vii

viii

B The Setup Menu: Camera Setup .............................................. 270

Setup Menu Options....................................................................... 270

Format Memory Card .............................................................. 272

Image Comment ....................................................................... 273

Copyright Information............................................................ 274

Time Zone and Date ................................................................ 275

Language..................................................................................... 275

Beep Options.............................................................................. 276

Touch Controls .......................................................................... 276

Monitor Brightness................................................................... 276

Info Display Format.................................................................. 277

Auto Info Display ...................................................................... 278

Info Display Auto Off ............................................................... 278

Image Dust Off Ref Photo ...................................................... 279

Flicker Reduction ...................................................................... 281

Slot Empty Release Lock......................................................... 281

Video Mode................................................................................. 281

Accessory Terminal .................................................................. 282

Eye-Fi Upload ............................................................................. 284

Conformity Marking................................................................. 285

Firmware Version...................................................................... 285

N The Retouch Menu: Creating Retouched Copies...................... 286

Retouch Menu Options.................................................................. 286

Creating Retouched Copies.......................................................... 288

NEF (RAW) Processing............................................................. 289

Trim................................................................................................ 291

Resize ............................................................................................ 292

D-Lighting ................................................................................... 294

Quick Retouch............................................................................ 295

Red-Eye Correction .................................................................. 295

Straighten.................................................................................... 296

Distortion Control..................................................................... 296

Perspective Control.................................................................. 297

Fisheye .......................................................................................... 297

Filter Effects................................................................................. 298

Monochrome .............................................................................. 299

Image Overlay ............................................................................ 300

Color Outline............................................................................... 302

Photo Illustration....................................................................... 303

Color Sketch ................................................................................ 303

Miniature Effect.......................................................................... 304

Selective Color............................................................................ 305

Painting......................................................................................... 307

Side-by-side Comparison ....................................................... 307

m Recent Settings/O My Menu ............................................. 309

Choosing a Menu.............................................................................. 309

m Recent Settings ............................................................................ 310

O My Menu......................................................................................... 310

Technical Notes

314

Compatible Lenses................................................................... 314

Compatible CPU Lenses ................................................................. 314

Compatible Non-CPU Lenses ....................................................... 316

Optional Flash Units (Speedlights) ....................................... 323

Flash Units Compatible with the Creative Lighting System

(CLS) .................................................................................................. 323

Other Accessories..................................................................... 330

Approved Memory Cards............................................................... 334

Attaching a Power Connector and AC Adapter..................... 335

Caring for the Camera ............................................................. 337

Storage ................................................................................................. 337

Cleaning ............................................................................................... 337

Image Sensor Cleaning................................................................... 338

ix

x

Caring for the Camera and Battery: Cautions .................... 343

Available Settings.................................................................... 348

Troubleshooting ...................................................................... 350

Battery/Display.................................................................................. 350

Shooting (All Modes) ...................................................................... 351

Shooting (P, S, A, M) .......................................................................... 354

Playback............................................................................................... 355

Wi-Fi (Wireless Networks).............................................................. 357

Miscellaneous .................................................................................... 357

Error Messages......................................................................... 358

Specifications ........................................................................... 364

Lens Kits .................................................................................... 377

AF-P DX NIKKOR 18–55mm f/3.5–5.6G VR and AF-P DX

NIKKOR 18–55mm f/3.5–5.6G ................................................. 377

AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–55mm f/3.5–5.6G VR II ........................... 383

AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–140mm f/3.5–5.6G ED VR ..................... 388

AF-S DX NIKKOR 55–200mm f/4–5.6G ED VR II...................... 393

Memory Card Capacity ........................................................... 399

Battery Life................................................................................ 400

Index .......................................................................................... 402

For Your Safety

To prevent damage to your Nikon product or injury to yourself or to others, read the following safety precautions in their entirety before using this equipment.

Keep these safety instructions where all those who use the product will read them.

The consequences that could result from failure to observe the precautions listed in this section are indicated by the following symbol:

A This icon marks warnings.

To prevent possible injury, read all warnings before using this Nikon product.

❚❚ WARNINGS

A

Keep the sun out of the frame

Keep the sun well out of the frame when shooting backlit subjects.

Sunlight focused into the camera when the sun is in or close to the frame could cause a fire.

A

Do not look at the sun through the viewfinder

Viewing the sun or other strong light source through the viewfinder could cause permanent visual impairment.

A

Using the viewfinder diopter adjustment control

When operating the viewfinder diopter adjustment control with your eye to the viewfinder, care should be taken not to put your finger in your eye accidentally.

A

Turn off immediately in the event of malfunction

Should you notice smoke or an unusual smell coming from the equipment or AC adapter (available separately), unplug the AC adapter and remove the battery immediately, taking care to avoid burns.

Continued operation could result in injury.

After removing the battery, take the equipment to a Nikonauthorized service center for inspection.

A

Do not use in the presence of flammable gas

Do not use electronic equipment in the presence of flammable gas, as this could result in explosion or fire.

xi

xii

A

Keep out of reach of children

Failure to observe this precaution could result in injury. In addition, note that small parts constitute a choking hazard. Should a child swallow any part of this equipment, consult a physician immediately.

A

Do not disassemble

Touching the product’s internal parts could result in injury.

In the event of malfunction, the product should be repaired only by a qualified technician.

Should the product break open as the result of a fall or other accident, remove the battery and/or

AC adapter and then take the product to a Nikon-authorized service center for inspection.

A

Do not place the strap around the neck of an infant or child

Placing the camera strap around the neck of an infant or child could result in strangulation.

A

Do not remain in contact with the camera, battery, or charger for extended periods while the devices are on or in use

Parts of the device become hot.

Leaving the device in direct contact with the skin for extended periods may result in low-temperature burns.

A

Do not leave the product where it will be exposed to extremely high temperatures, such as in an enclosed automobile or in direct sunlight

Failure to observe this precaution could cause damage or fire.

A

Do not aim a flash at the operator of a motor vehicle

Failure to observe this precaution could result in accidents.

A

Observe caution when using the flash

Using the camera with the flash in close contact with the skin or other objects could cause burns.

Using the flash close to the subject’s eyes could cause temporary visual impairment. The flash should be no less than one meter (3 ft 4 in.) from the subject. Particular care should be observed when photographing infants.

A

Avoid contact with liquid crystal

Should the monitor break, care should be taken to avoid injury due to broken glass and to prevent the liquid crystal from the monitor touching the skin or entering the eyes or mouth.

A

Do not carry tripods with a lens or camera attached

You could trip or accidentally strike others, resulting in injury.

A

Observe proper precautions when handling batteries

Batteries may leak, overheat, rupture, or catch fire if improperly handled.

Observe the following precautions when handling batteries for use in this product:

Use only batteries approved for use in this equipment.

Do not short or disassemble the battery.

Do not expose the battery or the camera in which it is inserted to powerful physical shocks.

Be sure the product is off before replacing the battery.

If you are using an AC adapter, be sure it is unplugged.

Do not attempt to insert the battery upside down or backwards.

Do not expose the battery to flame or to excessive heat.

Do not immerse in or expose to water.

Replace the terminal cover when transporting the battery.

Do not transport or store the battery with metal objects such as necklaces or hairpins.

Batteries are prone to leakage when fully discharged.

To avoid damage to the product, be sure to remove the battery when no charge remains.

When the battery is not in use, attach the terminal cover and store in a cool, dry place.

The battery may be hot immediately after use or when the product has been used on battery power for an extended period.

Before removing the battery turn the camera off and allow the battery to cool.

Discontinue use immediately should you notice any changes in the battery, such as discoloration or deformation.

A

Observe proper precautions when handling the charger

Keep dry.

Failure to observe this precaution could result in injury or product malfunction due to fire or electric shock.

Do not short the charger terminals.

Failure to observe this precaution could result in overheating and damage to the charger.

Dust on or near the metal parts of the plug should be removed with a dry cloth.

Continued use could result in fire.

Do not go near the charger during thunderstorms.

Failure to observe this precaution could result in electric shock.

Do not handle the plug or charger with wet hands. Failure to observe this precaution could result in injury or product malfunction due to fire or electric shock.

Do not use with travel converters or adapters designed to convert from one voltage to another or with DCto-AC inverters. Failure to observe this precaution could damage the product or cause overheating or fire.

xiii

xiv

A

Use appropriate cables

When connecting cables to the input and output jacks, use only the cables provided or sold by Nikon for the purpose to maintain compliance with product regulations.

A

Follow the instructions of airline and hospital personnel

Notices

No part of the manuals included with this product may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any language in any form, by any means, without Nikon’s prior written permission.

Nikon reserves the right to change the appearance and specifications of the hardware and software described in these manuals at any time and without prior notice.

Nikon will not be held liable for any damages resulting from the use of this product.

While every effort has been made to ensure that the information in these manuals is accurate and complete, we would appreciate it were you to bring any errors or omissions to the attention of the Nikon representative in your area (address provided separately).

Notice for Customers in Canada

CAN ICES-3 B / NMB-3 B

Notices for Customers in Europe

CAUTION:

RISK OF EXPLOSION IF BATTERY IS REPLACED BY AN INCORRECT

TYPE. DISPOSE OF USED BATTERIES ACCORDING TO THE INSTRUCTIONS.

This symbol indicates that electrical and electronic equipment is to be collected separately.

This symbol on the battery indicates that the battery is to be collected separately.

The following apply only to users in European countries:

This product is designated for separate collection at an appropriate collection point. Do not dispose of as household waste.

Separate collection and recycling helps conserve natural resources and prevent negative consequences for human health and the environment that might result from incorrect disposal.

For more information, contact the retailer or the local authorities in charge of waste management.

The following apply only to users in

European countries:

All batteries, whether marked with this symbol or not, are designated for separate collection at an appropriate collection point. Do not dispose of as household waste.

For more information, contact the retailer or the local authorities in charge of waste management.

xv

xvi

Notices for Customers in the U.S.A.

The Battery Charger

IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS—SAVE THESE

INSTRUCTIONS

DANGER—TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC

SHOCK, CAREFULLY FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS

For connection to a supply not in the U.S.A., use an attachment plug adapter of the proper configuration for the power outlet if needed. This power unit is intended to be correctly oriented in a vertical or floor mount position.

Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Radio Frequency Interference Statement

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a

Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15

D5500 of the FCC rules.

These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference

CAUTIONS

Modifications

in a residential installation.

This equipment generates, uses, and can

The FCC requires the user be notified that any changes or modifications radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful made to this device that are not expressly approved by Nikon interference to radio communications.

However, there is no guarantee that

Corporation may void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.

interference will not occur in a particular installation.

If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.

Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.

Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.

Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/television technician for help.

Interface Cables

Use the interface cables sold or provided by Nikon for your equipment.

Using other interface cables may exceed the limits of Class

B Part 15 of the FCC rules.

Notice for Customers in the State of California

WARNING

: Handling the cord on this product may expose you to lead, a chemical known to the State of

California to cause birth defects or other reproductive harm.

Wash hands

after handling.

Nikon Inc., 1300 Walt Whitman Road,

Melville, New York 11747-3064, U.S.A.

Tel.: 631-547-4200

Notice Concerning Prohibition of Copying or Reproduction

Note that simply being in possession of material that has been digitally copied or reproduced by means of a scanner, digital camera, or other device may be punishable by law.

• Items prohibited by law from being copied or reproduced

Do not copy or reproduce paper money, coins, securities, government bonds, or local government bonds, even if such copies or reproductions are stamped “Sample.”

The copying or reproduction of paper money, coins, or securities which are circulated in a foreign country is prohibited.

• Cautions on certain copies and reproductions

The government has issued cautions on copies or reproductions of securities issued by private companies (shares, bills, checks, gift certificates, etc.), commuter passes, or coupon tickets, except when a minimum of necessary copies are to be provided for business use by a company.

Also, do not copy or reproduce passports issued by the government, licenses issued by public agencies and private groups,

ID cards, and tickets, such as passes and meal coupons.

Unless the prior permission of the government has been obtained, the copying or reproduction of unused postage stamps or post cards issued by the government is prohibited.

The copying or reproduction of stamps issued by the government and of certified documents stipulated by law is prohibited.

• Comply with copyright notices

The copying or reproduction of copyrighted creative works such as books, music, paintings, woodcuts, prints, maps, drawings, movies, and photographs is governed by national and international copyright laws.

Do not use this product for the purpose of making illegal copies or to infringe copyright laws.

xvii

xviii

Disposing of Data Storage Devices

Please note that deleting images or formatting memory cards or other data storage devices does not completely erase the original image data.

Deleted files can sometimes be recovered from discarded storage devices using commercially available software, potentially resulting in the malicious use of personal image data.

Ensuring the privacy of such data is the user’s responsibility.

Before discarding a data storage device or transferring ownership to another person, erase all data using commercial deletion software, or format the device and then completely refill it with images containing no private information (for example, pictures of empty sky). Be sure to also replace any pictures selected for preset manual (

0 146). Before discarding the camera or

transferring ownership to another person, you should also use the Wi-Fi >

Network settings > Reset network settings ( 0 230) option in the camera

setup menu to delete any personal network information. Care should be taken to avoid injury when physically destroying data storage devices.

AVC Patent Portfolio License

T

HIS PRODUCT IS LICENSED UNDER THE

AVC

PATENT PORTFOLIO LICENSE FOR THE PERSONAL

AND NON

-

COMMERCIAL USE OF A CONSUMER TO

(i)

ENCODE VIDEO IN COMPLIANCE WITH

THE

AVC

STANDARD

(“AVC

VIDEO

”)

AND

/

OR

(ii)

DECODE

AVC

VIDEO THAT WAS ENCODED

BY A CONSUMER ENGAGED IN A PERSONAL AND NON

-

COMMERCIAL ACTIVITY AND

/

OR WAS

OBTAINED FROM A VIDEO PROVIDER LICENSED TO PROVIDE

AVC

VIDEO

. N

O LICENSE IS

GRANTED OR SHALL BE IMPLIED FOR ANY OTHER USE

. A

DDITIONAL INFORMATION MAY BE

OBTAINED FROM

MPEG LA, L.L.C. S

EE

http://www.mpegla.com

Use Only Nikon Brand Electronic Accessories

Nikon cameras are designed to the highest standards and include complex electronic circuitry.

Only Nikon brand electronic accessories (including chargers, batteries, AC adapters, and flash accessories) certified by Nikon specifically for use with this Nikon digital camera are engineered and proven to operate within the operational and safety requirements of this electronic circuitry.

The use of non-Nikon electronic accessories could damage the camera and may void your Nikon warranty.

The use of third-party rechargeable Li-ion batteries not bearing the

Nikon holographic seal shown at right could interfere with normal operation of the camera or result in the batteries overheating, igniting, rupturing, or leaking.

For more information about Nikon brand accessories, contact a local authorized Nikon dealer.

D

Use Only Nikon Brand Accessories

Only Nikon brand accessories certified by Nikon specifically for use with your Nikon digital camera are engineered and proven to operate within its operational and safety requirements. T

HE USE OF NON

-N

IKON ACCESSORIES

COULD DAMAGE YOUR CAMERA AND MAY VOID YOUR

N

IKON WARRANTY

.

A

Before Taking Important Pictures

Before taking pictures on important occasions (such as at weddings or before taking the camera on a trip), take a test shot to ensure that the camera is functioning normally. Nikon will not be held liable for damages or lost profits that may result from product malfunction.

A

Life-Long Learning

As part of Nikon’s “Life-Long Learning” commitment to ongoing product support and education, continually-updated information is available online at the following sites:

• For users in the U.S.A.: http://www.nikonusa.com/

• For users in Europe and Africa: http://www.europe-nikon.com/support/

• For users in Asia, Oceania, and the Middle East: http://www.nikon-asia.com/

Visit these sites to keep up-to-date with the latest product information, tips, answers to frequently-asked questions (FAQs), and general advice on digital imaging and photography. Additional information may be available from the Nikon representative in your area. See the following URL for contact information: http://imaging.nikon.com/ xix

xx

Wireless

This product, which contains encryption software developed in the United

States, is controlled by the United States Export Administration Regulations and may not be exported or re-exported to any country to which the United

States embargoes goods. The following countries are currently subject to embargo: Cuba, Iran, North Korea, Sudan, and Syria.

The use of wireless devices may be prohibited in some countries or regions.

Contact a Nikon-authorized service representative before using the wireless features of this product outside the country of purchase.

Notices for Customers in the U. S. A.

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

FCC WARNING

The FCC requires the user to be notified that any changes or modifications made to this device that are not expressly approved by Nikon Corporation may void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.

FCC Radio Frequency Interference Statement

Note: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications.

However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.

Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.

Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.

Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.

Co-location

This transmitter must not be co-located or operated in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter.

Nikon Inc., 1300 Walt Whitman Road, Melville, New York 11747-3064, U.S.A.

Tel.: 631-547-4200

Notices for Customers in Canada

This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).

Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

FCC/IC RF Exposure Statement

The available scientific evidence does not show that any health problems are associated with using low power wireless devices. There is no proof, however, that these low power wireless devices are absolutely safe. Low power

Wireless devices emit low levels of radio frequency energy (RF) in the microwave range while being used. Whereas high levels of RF can produce health effects (by heating tissue), exposure of low-level RF that does not produce heating effects causes no known adverse health effects. Many studies of low-level RF exposures have not found any biological effects. Some studies have suggested that some biological effects might occur, but such findings have not been confirmed by additional research. The D5500, which is equipped with a LBWA1U5YR1 (FCC ID: VPYLBYR650/IC ID: 772C-LBYR650) wireless LAN module, has been tested and found to comply with FCC/IC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment and meets the FCC radio frequency (RF) Exposure Guidelines in Supplement C to

OET65 and RSS-102 of the IC radio frequency (RF) Exposure rules. Please refer to the SAR test report that was uploaded to FCC website.

xxi

xxii

Notices for Customers in Europe

Hereby, Nikon Corporation, declares that the D5500 is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC. The declaration of conformity may be consulted at http://imaging.nikon.com/support/pdf/DoC_D5500.pdf

Notice for Customers in Singapore

Trade Name:

Model: D5500

This device complies with radio-frequency regulations. The content of certification labels not affixed to the device is given below.

Complies with

IDA Standards

DA103423

Security

Although one of the benefits of this product is that it allows others to freely connect for the wireless exchange of data anywhere within its range, the following may occur if security is not enabled:

Data theft: Malicious third-parties may intercept wireless transmissions to steal user IDs, passwords, and other personal information.

Unauthorized access: Unauthorized users may gain access to the network and alter data or perform other malicious actions. Note that due to the design of wireless networks, specialized attacks may allow unauthorized access even when security is enabled.

Introduction

Getting to Know the Camera

Take a few moments to familiarize yourself with camera controls and displays. You may find it helpful to bookmark this section and refer to it as you read through the rest of the manual.

The Camera Body

19

5

4

3

2

1

6 7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

18 17

16 15

1

AF-assist illuminator ........... 81, 250

Self-timer lamp.............................. 76

Red-eye reduction lamp .......94, 96

2

Power switch.................................. 31

3

Shutter-release button................. 41

4

E/N button...............120, 129, 131

5

Movie-record button .......... 51, 175

6

Live view switch ....45, 50, 162, 174

7

Mode dial...........................................4

8

Built-in flash ................................... 93

9

M/ Y button..................93, 95, 131

10

Eyelets for camera strap.............. 27

11 Fn

button ...................................... 265

12

Mounting mark ............................. 29

13

Lens release button...................... 37

14

I/E/#

button ............... 71,

72, 74, 75, 107

15

Mirror............................................. 340

16

Lens mount ..............................29, 89

17

CPU contacts

18

Infrared receiver for ML-L3 remote control (front)

............................108

19

Body cap

Introduction

1

20 21 22

23 24 25

33

30

29

28

27

26

32

31

20

Stereo microphone .................... 178

21

Accessory shoe (for optional flash

units) ............................................ 323

22

Eye sensor.................................9, 278

23

R (information)

button ..............................8, 110, 170

24

Command dial

25

A/L button .....87, 127, 202, 267

26

Connector cover

27

G button...................13, 110, 233

28

Infrared receiver for ML-L3 remote control (rear)

..............................108

29

Speaker

30

Focal plane mark (

E)...................89

31

USB and A/V

connector.................. 211, 214, 220

32

Connector for external microphone

...............................180

33

Accessory terminal..................... 333

D

Close the Connector Cover

Close the connector cover when the connectors are not in use. Foreign matter in the connectors can interfere with data transfer.

D

The Speaker

Do not place the speaker in close proximity to magnetic devices.

Failure to observe this precaution could affect the data recorded on the magnetic devices.

2

Introduction

48

34 35 36 37

38

39

40

41

47

49

50

51

46

45 44 43 42

52

34

Viewfinder eyepiece.......... 5, 33, 76

35

Diopter adjustment control ....... 33

36

K button............................... 42, 188

37

P button............... 10, 171, 178, 189

38

Multi selector ...........................12, 14

39

J (OK) button.........................12, 14

40

O button ................................ 43, 205

41

Memory card access

lamp....................................... 41, 163

42

Battery-chamber cover

latch .................................28, 35, 335

43

Battery-chamber cover

..........................................28, 35, 335

44

W/Q button.................14, 190, 200

45

X button.............................. 190, 200

46

Tripod socket

47

Vari-angle monitor

......................6, 17, 42, 45, 162, 188

48

Rubber eyecup .............................. 76

49

HDMI connector cover .............. 222

50

Memory card slot cover ........28, 35

51

Power connector cover for

optional power connector ...... 335

52

Battery latch....................28, 35, 335

Introduction

3

The Mode Dial

The camera offers a choice of the following shooting modes.

P, S, A, and M Modes:

• P—Programmed auto (

0 115)

• S —Shutter-priority auto ( 0 117)

• A—Aperture-priority auto (

0 118)

• M—Manual ( 0 119)

Special Effects Modes

(

0 61)

Auto Modes:

i Auto (0 38)

j Auto (flash off) (0 38)

Scene Modes

( 0 54)

4

Introduction

The Viewfinder

Note

: Display shown with all indicators lit for illustrative purposes.

1 2

3

4

5

6

7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

16 17 18

19

20 21

1

Framing grid (displayed when

On is selected for Custom Setting d3,

Viewfinder grid display) ...256

2

Focus points ................................... 85

3

AF area brackets......................33, 40

4

Low battery warning ................... 34

5

Monochrome indicator (displayed in

% mode or when the

Monochrome Picture Control or a Picture Control based on

Monochrome is

selected) ............................... 61, 152

6

“No memory card” indicator ...... 28

7

Focus indicator ........................40, 89

8

Autoexposure (AE) lock

indicator.......................................127

9

Shutter speed ..............................114

10

Aperture (f-number) ..................114

11

Special effects mode indicator .. 61

12

Bracketing indicator...................148

13

Number of exposures

remaining...................................... 34

Number of shots remaining before

memory buffer fills ..................... 73

White balance recording

indicator ...................................... 143

Exposure compensation

value ............................................. 129

Flash compensation value........ 131

ISO sensitivity ....................... 99, 252

Capture mode indicator

14

“k” (appears when memory remains for over 1000

exposures)..................................... 34

15

Flash-ready indicator ................... 44

16

Flexible program indicator....... 116

17

Exposure indicator ..................... 120

Exposure compensation

display.......................................... 129

Electronic rangefinder............... 250

18

Flash compensation indicator... 131

19

Exposure compensation

indicator ...................................... 129

20

Auto ISO sensitivity indicator .. 241

21

Warning indicator....................... 358

Introduction

5

The Monitor

The monitor can be angled and rotated as shown below.

180°

Normal use:

Fold the monitor against the camera face out. The monitor is normally used in this position.

Low-angle shots:

Tilt the monitor up to take shots in live view with the camera held low.

90°

High-angle shots:

Tilt the monitor down to take shots in live view with the camera held high.

Self-portraits

: Use for self-portraits in live view. The monitor shows a mirror image of what will appear in the final picture.

180°

6

Introduction

D

Using the Monitor

Rotate the monitor gently within the limits shown. Do not use force.

Failure to observe these precautions could damage the camera or monitor. To protect the monitor when the camera is not in use, fold it back face down against the camera body.

Do not lift or carry the camera by the monitor. Failure to observe this precaution could damage the camera.

Introduction

7

The Information Display

Viewing settings

: To view the information display, press the R button.

4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

R button

1

2

3 13

1

Shooting mode i auto/

j auto (flash off).....................38

Scene modes ............................54

Special effects mode ..............61

P

, S, A, and M modes............. 113

2

Aperture (f-number) .................. 114

Aperture display ......................... 114

3

Shutter speed .............................. 114

Shutter-speed display ............... 114

4

Satellite signal indicator ........... 284

5

Wi-Fi connection indicator....... 230

Eye-Fi connection indicator ..... 284

6

Touch Fn assignment ................ 268

7

Vignette control indicator ........ 244

8

Exposure delay mode................ 254

9

Date stamp indicator................. 256

10

Vibration reduction indicator

.................................................37, 245

11

Flash control indicator .............. 259

Flash compensation indicator for

optional flash units................... 328

12

Battery indicator............................34

13

ISO sensitivity.................................99

ISO sensitivity display..........99, 242

Auto ISO sensitivity

indicator ...................................... 242

8

Introduction

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

23

14

Bracketing indicator...................148

15

Autoexposure (AE) lock

indicator.......................................127

22

16

AF-area mode indicator .............. 82

Focus point..................................... 85

17

Release mode ................................ 71

18

ADL bracketing amount............149

19

Number of exposures

remaining ...................................... 34

White balance recording

indicator.......................................143

Capture mode indicator

20

“k” (appears when memory remains for over 1000

exposures)..................................... 34

21

z icon............................................. 24

22

Exposure indicator ..................... 120

Exposure compensation

indicator ...................................... 129

Bracketing progress

indicator ...................................... 151

23

Help icon....................................... 358

Note

: Display shown with all indicators lit for illustrative purposes.

A

Info Display Auto Off

The eye sensor will automatically turn the info display off if you put your eye to the viewfinder while the standby timer is active. The display will turn on again when you remove your eye from the viewfinder. If desired, you can prevent the information display turning off using the Info display auto off option (

0 278) in the setup menu.

Note, however, that regardless of the option selected the information display will turn off when the standby timer expires.

Introduction

9

Changing settings

: To change the settings at the bottom of the display, press the

P button, then highlight items using the multi selector and press J to view options for the highlighted item. You can also change settings by pressing the

P

button during live view (

0 171, 178).

3 4 5

P button

2

1

6

7

14 13 12

1

Image quality .................................90

11 10 9 8

9

Flash compensation .................. 131

2

Image size........................................92

3

Auto bracketing .......................... 149

4

HDR (high dynamic range)....... 135

5

Active D-Lighting ....................... 133

6

White balance ............................. 137

7

ISO sensitivity .................................99

8

Exposure compensation ........... 129

10

Flash mode .............................. 94, 96

11

Metering....................................... 125

12

AF-area mode........................82, 166

13

Focus mode ...........................78, 164

14

Picture Control ............................ 152

10 Introduction

A

Turning the Monitor Off

To clear shooting information from the monitor, press the R button or press the shutter-release button halfway. The monitor will turn off automatically if no operations are performed for about 8 seconds (for information on choosing how long the monitor stays on, see Auto off

timers on page 253). The monitor will also turn off if you cover the eye

sensor or look through the viewfinder.

Introduction

11

The Multi Selector

In this manual, operations using the multi selector are represented by 1, 3, 4, and 2 icons.

1: Press the multi selector up

J button

4: Press the multi selector left

2: Press the multi selector right

3: Press the multi selector down

12 Introduction

Camera Menus: An Overview

Most shooting, playback, and setup options can be accessed from the camera menus. To view the menus, press the

G button.

G button

Tabs

Choose from the following menus:

D: Playback (0 233)

C: Shooting (0 236)

A: Custom Settings (0 246)

B: Setup (0 270)

N: Retouch (0 286)

m/O: Recent settings or My Menu

(defaults to Recent settings;

0 309)

Current settings are shown by icons.

Help icon (

0 14)

Menu options

Options in current menu.

Introduction

13

Using Camera Menus

❚❚ Menu Controls

The multi selector and J button are used to navigate the camera menus.

4: Cancel and

return to previous menu

1: Move cursor up

J button: select

highlighted item

2: Select highlighted item

or display sub-menu

3: Move cursor down

A

The

d (Help) Icon

If a d icon is displayed at the bottom left corner of the monitor, a description of the currently selected option or menu can be displayed by pressing the

W (Q) button. Press 1 or 3 to scroll through the display. Press W (Q) again to return to the menus.

14 Introduction

W (Q) button

❚❚ Navigating the Menus

Follow the steps below to navigate the menus.

1

Display the menus.

Press the G button to display the menus.

2

Highlight the icon for the current menu.

Press 4 to highlight the icon for the current menu.

3

Select a menu.

Press 1 or 3 to select the desired menu.

G button

4

Position the cursor in the selected menu.

Press

2 to position the cursor in the selected menu.

Introduction

15

5

Highlight a menu item.

Press

1 or 3 to highlight a menu item.

6

Display options.

Press 2 to display options for the selected menu item.

7

Highlight an option.

Press

1 or 3 to highlight an option.

8

Select the highlighted item.

Press

J to select the highlighted item. To exit without making a selection, press the

G button.

Note the following:

Menu items that are displayed in gray are not currently available.

While pressing

2 generally has the same effect as pressing J, there are some cases in which selection can only be made by pressing J.

To exit the menus and return to shooting mode, press the

shutter-release button halfway ( 0 41).

16 Introduction

Using the Touch Screen

The touch-sensitive monitor supports the following operations:

Flick

Flick a finger a short distance across the monitor.

Slide

Slide a finger over the monitor.

Stretch/Pinch

Place two fingers on the monitor and move them apart or pinch them together.

Introduction

17

D

The Touch Screen

The touch screen responds to static electricity and may not respond when covered with third-party protective films or when touched with fingernails or gloved hands. Do not use excessive force or touch the screen with sharp objects.

D

Using the Touch Screen

The touch screen may not respond as expected if you attempt to operate it while leaving your palm or another finger resting on it in second location. It may not recognize other gestures if your touch is too soft, your fingers are moved too quickly or too short a distance or do not remain in contact with the screen, or if the movement of the two fingers in a pinch or stretch is not correctly coordinated.

A

Enabling or Disabling Touch Controls

Touch controls can be enabled or disabled using the Touch controls

option in the setup menu (

0 276). Select Enable to enable touch

controls for shooting, playback, and menu navigation or Playback

only to enable touch controls for playback only.

18 Introduction

Touch-Screen Photography

Tap icons in the shooting display to adjust camera settings (note that not all icons will respond to touch-screen operations).

During live view, you can also take photographs by tapping the monitor.

❚❚ Viewfinder Photography

Use the touch screen to adjust settings in the information

display ( 0 8).

Scene/Effect Selection

In scene and special effects modes (

0 54, 61), you can tap the

shooting mode icon to choose a scene or effect. Tap x or y to view the different options and tap an icon to select and return to the previous display.

Shutter Speed and Aperture

In modes S, A, and M, you can tap the w icon next to the shutter speed or aperture displays to view x and y controls, which you can tap to choose a new value. Tap 1 to exit when the operation is complete.

Introduction

19

Shooting Options

To change camera settings (

0 10), tap the z icon at the bottom

right corner of the display and then tap icons to display options for the corresponding setting. Tap the desired option to select it and return to the previous display.

If prompted to choose a value as shown at right, edit the value by tapping u or v and then tap the number or tap 0 to select it and return to the previous display.

To exit without changing settings, tap

2.

20 Introduction

❚❚ Live View Photography

The touch screen can be used to adjust settings and take photographs.

Taking Photographs (Touch Shutter)

Touch the monitor to focus and lift your finger to take the photograph.

Tap the icon shown at right to choose the operation performed by tapping the monitor in shooting mode. Choose from the following options:

Option

3 (touch shutter on)

Description

Touch the monitor to position the focus point and focus (autofocus only; the touch shutter can not be used to focus when MF—manual focus—is selected for focus mode as

described on page 164). The shutter is

released when you lift your finger from the screen.

7 (touch shutter off)

As above, except that lifting your finger from the screen does not release the shutter.

Focus locks while your finger is on the monitor. During movie recording, the touch shutter remains off ( 7) and you can refocus at any time by touching your subject in the monitor; the touch shutter options icon is not displayed.

Introduction

21

D

Taking Pictures Using Tap Shooting Options

Avoid moving the camera when releasing the shutter. Camera movement can result in blurred photographs.

The shutter-release button can be used to focus and take pictures even when the

3 icon is displayed to show that touch shooting options are active. Use the shutter-release button to take photographs in continuous shooting mode (

0 72) and during movie recording. Touch

shooting options can be used only to take pictures one at a time in continuous shooting mode and can not be used to take photographs during movie recording.

While subject tracking ( 0 166) is active and 7 (touch shutter off ) is

selected, you can focus on the current subject by tapping the monitor.

In self-timer mode (

0 75), focus locks on the selected subject when

you touch the monitor and the timer starts when you lift your finger from the screen. At default settings, the shutter is released about 10 s after the timer starts; the delay and number of shots can be changed

using Custom Setting c3 (Self-timer, 0 254). If the option selected for

Number of shots is greater than 1, the camera will automatically take pictures one after the other until the selected number of shots is recorded.

22 Introduction

Scene/Effect Selection

In scene and special effects modes (

0 54, 61), you can tap the

shooting mode icon to choose a scene or effect. Tap x or y to view the different options and tap an icon to select and return to the previous display.

Shutter Speed and Aperture

In modes S, A, and M, tapping the shutter speed or aperture displays x and y controls, which you can tap to choose a new value. Tap

1 to exit when the operation is complete.

Introduction

23

Shooting Options

In live view, pressing the

P button or tapping the z icon in the monitor activates the information display (

0 171, 178). Tap a

setting to view options and then tap the desired option to select it and return to live view.

If prompted to choose a value as shown at right, edit the value by tapping u or v and then tap the number or tap

0 to select it and return to the previous display.

To exit without changing settings, tap

2.

24 Introduction

Viewing Pictures

The touch screen can be used for the following playback operations (

0 42, 188).

View other images

Flick left or right to view other images.

Zoom in

(photos only)

View thumbnails

View movies

Guide

Use stretch and pinch gestures to zoom in and out and slide to scroll

( 0 200).

To “zoom out” to a thumbnail view

( 0 190), use a pinch gesture in

full-frame playback. Use pinch and stretch to choose the number of images displayed from 4, 12, or 80 frames.

Tap the on-screen guide to start movie playback (movies are indicated by a 1 icon). Tap the display to pause or resume, or tap

1 to exit to full-frame playback

(note that some of the icons in the movie playback display do not respond to touch-screen operations).

Introduction

25

Using the Menus

The touch screen can be used for the following menu operations.

Scroll

Slide up or down to scroll.

Choose a menu

Tap a menu icon to choose a menu.

Select options/ adjust settings

Tap menu items to display options and tap icons or sliders to change.

To exit without changing settings, tap 1.

26 Introduction

First Steps

Follow the eight steps below to ready the camera for use.

1

Attach the strap.

Attach the strap as shown. Repeat for the second eyelet.

2

Charge the battery.

If a plug adapter is supplied, raise the wall plug and connect the plug adapter as shown below at left, making sure the plug is fully inserted. Insert the battery and plug the charger in. An exhausted battery will fully charge in about an hour and 50 minutes.

Battery charging

Charging complete

A

The Battery and Charger

Read and follow the warnings and cautions on pages xi–xiv and 343–347

of this manual.

Introduction

27

3

Insert the battery and memory card.

Before inserting or removing the battery or memory cards, confirm that power switch is in the OFF position. Insert the battery in the orientation shown, using the battery to keep the orange battery latch pressed to one side. The latch locks the battery in place when the battery is fully inserted.

Battery latch

Slide the memory card in until it clicks into place.

28 Introduction

4

Attach a lens.

Be careful to prevent dust from entering the camera when the lens or body cap is removed.

Remove the camera body cap

Remove the rear lens cap

Mounting mark (camera)

Align the mounting marks

Mounting mark (lens)

Rotate the lens as shown until it clicks into place

Be sure to remove the lens cap before taking pictures.

Introduction

29

A

Lenses with Retractable Lens Barrel Buttons

Before using the camera, unlock and extend the lens. Keeping the retractable lens barrel button pressed (q), rotate the zoom ring as shown (w).

Retractable lens barrel button

Pictures can not be taken when the lens is retracted; if an error message is displayed as a result of the camera having been turned on with the lens retracted, rotate the zoom ring until the message is no longer displayed.

30 Introduction

5

Open the monitor.

Open the monitor as shown. Do not use force.

6

Turn the camera on.

A language-selection dialog will be displayed.

A

The Power Switch

Rotate the power switch as shown to turn the camera on.

Rotate the power switch as shown to turn the camera off.

Introduction

31

7

Choose a language and set the camera clock.

Use the multi selector and J button to select a language and set the camera clock.

Move cursor up

Move cursor down

J button: select

highlighted item

Select highlighted item or display submenu

q w e

Select language

r

Select time zone

t

Select date format Select daylight saving time option

Set time and date (note that the camera uses a 24-hour clock)

A

The Camera Clock

The camera clock is less accurate than most watches and household clocks.

Check the clock regularly against more accurate time pieces and reset as necessary.

32 Introduction

8

Focus the viewfinder.

After removing the lens cap, rotate the diopter adjustment control until the AF area brackets are in sharp focus. When operating the control with your eye to the viewfinder, be careful not to put your fingers or fingernails in your eye.

AF area brackets

Viewfinder not in focus Viewfinder in focus

The camera is now ready for use. Proceed to page 38 for

information on taking photographs.

A

The Clock Battery

The camera clock is powered by an independent, rechargeable power source, which is charged as necessary when the main battery is installed.

Three days of charging will power the clock for about a month.

If a message warning that the clock is not set is displayed when the camera is turned on, the clock battery is exhausted and the clock has been reset.

Set the clock to the correct time and date.

Introduction

33

❚❚ The Battery Level and Number of Exposures Remaining

Press the

R button and check the battery level and number of exposures remaining in the information display.

Battery level

R button

Number of exposures remaining

Battery Level

If the battery is low, a warning will also be displayed in the viewfinder. If the information display does not appear when the

R button is pressed, the battery is exhausted and needs to be recharged.

Information display

L

K

H

H

(flashes)

Viewfinder

— d d

(flashes)

Description

Battery fully charged.

Battery partially discharged.

Low battery. Ready fully-charged spare battery or prepare to charge battery.

Battery exhausted. Charge battery.

Number of Exposures Remaining

Values over 1000 are shown in thousands, indicated by the letter

“k”.

34 Introduction

❚❚ Removing the Battery and Memory Cards

Removing the Battery

Turn the camera off and open the batterychamber cover. Press the battery latch in the direction shown by the arrow to release the battery and then remove the battery by hand.

Removing Memory Cards

After confirming that the memory card access lamp is off, turn the camera off, open the memory card slot cover, and press the card in to eject it (q). The card can then be removed by hand (w).

A

The Write Protect Switch

SD memory cards are equipped with a write protect switch to prevent accidental loss of data.

16

GB

When this switch is in the “lock” position, the memory card can not

Write-protect switch

be formatted and photos can not be deleted or recorded (a beep will sound if you attempt to release the shutter). To unlock the memory card, slide the switch to the “write” position.

Introduction

35

D

Memory Cards

Memory cards may be hot after use.

Observe due caution when removing memory cards from the camera.

Turn the power off before inserting or removing memory cards. Do not remove memory cards from the camera, turn the camera off, or remove or disconnect the power source during formatting or while data are being recorded, deleted, or copied to a computer.

Failure to observe these precautions could result in loss of data or in damage to the camera or card.

Do not touch the card terminals with your fingers or metal objects.

Do not bend, drop, or subject to strong physical shocks.

Do not apply force to the card casing.

Failure to observe this precaution could damage the card.

Do not expose to water, heat, high levels of humidity, or direct sunlight.

Do not format memory cards in a computer.

36 Introduction

❚❚ Detaching the Lens

Be sure the camera is off when removing or exchanging lenses. To remove the lens, press and hold the lens release button (q) while turning the lens clockwise (w). After removing the lens, replace the lens caps and camera body cap.

A

A-M, M/A-M, and A/M-M Switches

When using autofocus with a lens equipped with an A-M mode switch, slide the switch to

A

(if the lens has an M/A-M or A/M-M switch, select M/A or A/M). For information on other lenses that can be used with this camera, see

page 314.

A

Vibration Reduction (VR)

Vibration reduction can be enabled by selecting On for Optical VR in the shooting

menu ( 0 245), if the lens supports this

option, or by sliding the lens vibration reduction switch to ON, if the lens is equipped with a vibration reduction switch.

A vibration reduction indicator appears in the information display when vibration reduction is on.

A

Retracting Lenses with Retractable Lens Barrel Buttons

To retract the lens when the camera is not in use, press and hold the retractable lens barrel button (q) and rotate the zoom ring to the “L” (lock) position as shown (w).

Retract the lens before removing it from the camera, and be careful not to press the retractable lens barrel button when attaching or removing the lens.

Introduction

37

“Point-and-Shoot” Modes (

i and j)

This section describes how to shoot photographs and movies in i and j modes, automatic “point-and-shoot” modes in which the majority of settings are controlled by the camera in response to shooting conditions.

Before proceeding, turn the camera on and rotate the mode dial to i or j (the only difference between the two is that the flash will not fire in j mode).

Mode dial

Viewfinder photography

Taking photographs

0 39

Viewing photographs

0 42

Deleting photographs

0 43

Live view

Taking photographs

Viewing photographs

0 45

0 48

Deleting photographs

0 49

Shooting movies

Viewing movies

Deleting movies

0 50

0 52

0 53

38 “Point-and-Shoot” Modes ( i and j)

Framing Photos in the Viewfinder

1

Ready the camera.

When framing photographs in the viewfinder, hold the handgrip in your right hand and cradle the camera body or lens with your left.

When framing photographs in portrait (tall) orientation, hold the camera as shown at right.

A

Using a Zoom Lens

Before focusing, rotate the zoom ring to adjust the focal length and frame the photograph. Use the zoom ring to zoom in on the subject so that it fills a larger area of the frame, or zoom out to increase the area visible in the final photograph (select longer focal lengths on the lens focal length scale to zoom in, shorter focal lengths to zoom out).

Zoom in

If the lens is equipped with a retractable lens barrel button (

0 30), press and hold the

button while rotating the zoom ring until the lens is released and the message shown at right is no longer displayed, and then adjust zoom using the zoom ring.

Zoom ring

Zoom out

“Point-and-Shoot” Modes (

i and j) 39

2

Frame the photograph.

Frame a photograph in the viewfinder with the main subject in the AF area brackets.

AF area brackets

3

Press the shutter-release button halfway.

Focus point

Press the shutter-release button halfway to focus (if the subject is poorly lit, the flash may pop up and the

AF-assist illuminator may light). When the focus operation is complete, a

In-focus indicator

Buffer capacity

beep will sound (a beep may not sound if the subject is moving) and the active focus point and in-focus indicator ( I) will appear in the viewfinder.

In-focus indicator

I

I (flashes)

Description

Subject in focus.

Camera unable to focus using autofocus. See

page 80.

40 “Point-and-Shoot” Modes ( i and j)

4

Shoot.

Smoothly press the shutter-release button the rest of the way down to take the photograph. The memory card access lamp will light and the photograph will be displayed in the monitor for a few seconds. Do not

eject the memory card or remove or disconnect the power source until the lamp has gone out and recording

is complete.

Memory card access lamp

A

The Shutter-Release Button

The camera has a two-stage shutter-release button. The camera focuses when the shutter-release button is pressed halfway. To take the photograph, press the shutter-release button the rest of the way down.

Focus: press halfway Shoot: press all the way down

Pressing the shutter-release button halfway also ends playback and readies the camera for immediate use.

“Point-and-Shoot” Modes (

i and j) 41

Viewing Photographs

Pressing K displays a picture in the monitor.

K button

Press

4 or 2 to view additional pictures.

42 “Point-and-Shoot” Modes ( i and j)

Deleting Unwanted Pictures

Display the photograph you wish to delete.

Note that photographs can not be recovered once deleted.

Press O; a confirmation dialog will be displayed.

K button

O button

Press the O button again to delete the picture.

“Point-and-Shoot” Modes (

i and j) 43

A

The Standby Timer (Viewfinder Photography)

The viewfinder and information display will turn off if no operations are performed for about eight seconds, reducing the drain on the battery. Press the shutterrelease button halfway to reactivate the display. The length of time before the standby timer expires automatically can be selected using Custom Setting c2 (Auto off

timers; 0 253).

Exposure meters off

A

The Built-in Flash

If additional lighting is required for correct exposure in i mode, the built-in flash will pop up automatically when the shutter-

release button is pressed halfway ( 0 93). If

the flash is raised, photographs can only be taken when the flash-ready indicator ( M) is displayed. If the flash-ready indicator is not displayed, the flash is charging; remove your finger briefly from the shutter-release button and try again.

Exposure meters on

When the flash is not in use, return it to its closed position by pressing it gently downward till the latch clicks into place.

44 “Point-and-Shoot” Modes ( i and j)

Framing Photos in the Monitor

1

Rotate the live view switch.

The view through the lens will be displayed in the camera monitor (live view).

Live view switch

2

Ready the camera.

Hold the handgrip in your right hand and cradle the camera body or lens with your left.

When framing photographs in portrait (tall) orientation, hold the camera as shown at right.

“Point-and-Shoot” Modes (

i and j) 45

3

Focus.

Press the shutter-release button halfway. The focus point will flash green while the camera focuses. If the camera is able to focus, the focus point will be

Focus point

displayed in green; if the camera is unable to focus, the focus point will flash red.

4

Take the picture.

Press the shutter-release button the rest of the way down. The monitor turns off and the memory card access lamp lights during recording. Do not eject the

memory card or remove or disconnect the power source until the lamp has gone out

and recording is complete.

Memory card access lamp

When recording is complete, the photograph will be displayed in the monitor for a few seconds.

Rotate the live view switch to exit live view.

46 “Point-and-Shoot” Modes ( i and j)

A

Automatic Scene Selection (Scene Auto Selector)

If live view is selected in i or j mode, the camera will automatically analyze the subject and select the appropriate shooting mode when autofocus is enabled. The selected mode is shown in the monitor.

c

Portrait

d

Landscape

e

Close up

f

Night portrait

Z

Auto

b

Auto (flash off)

Human portrait subjects

Landscapes and cityscapes

Subjects close to the camera

Portrait subjects framed against a dark background

Subjects suited to i or j mode or that do not fall into the categories listed above

A

Live View

For more information on taking photographs in live view, see page

162.

“Point-and-Shoot” Modes (

i and j) 47

Viewing Photographs

Pressing K displays a picture in the monitor.

K button

Press

4 or 2 to view additional pictures.

48 “Point-and-Shoot” Modes ( i and j)

Deleting Unwanted Pictures

Display the photograph you wish to delete. Note that photographs can not be

recovered once deleted.

Press O; a confirmation dialog will be displayed.

K button

O button

Press the O button again to delete the picture.

“Point-and-Shoot” Modes (

i and j) 49

Recording Movies

Movies can be recorded in live view mode.

1

Rotate the live view switch.

The view through the lens is displayed in the monitor.

Live view switch

2

Ready the camera.

Hold the handgrip in your right hand and cradle the camera body or lens with your left.

3

Focus.

Press the shutter-release button halfway to focus.

Focus point

50 “Point-and-Shoot” Modes ( i and j)

4

Start recording.

Press the movie-record button to start recording. A recording indicator and the time available are displayed in the monitor.

Movie-record button

Time remaining

5

End recording.

Press the movie-record button again to end recording. Rotate the live view switch to exit live view.

Recording indicator

“Point-and-Shoot” Modes (

i and j) 51

Viewing Movies

Press K to start playback and then scroll through pictures until a movie (indicated by a 1 icon) is displayed. Press J to start playback and press

1 or K to end playback. For more information, see page

181.

K button

A

Recording Movies

See page 174 for more information on recording movies.

52 “Point-and-Shoot” Modes ( i and j)

Deleting Unwanted Movies

Display the movie you wish to delete

(movies are indicated by 1 icons). Note

that movies can not be recovered once deleted.

Press

O; a confirmation dialog will be displayed.

K button

O button

Press the O button again to delete the movie.

“Point-and-Shoot” Modes (

i and j) 53

Matching Settings to the Subject or

Situation (Scene Mode)

The camera offers a choice of “scene” modes. Choosing a scene mode automatically optimizes settings to suit the selected scene, making creative photography as simple as selecting a

mode, framing a picture, and shooting as described on page 38.

The following scenes can be selected by rotating the mode dial to h and rotating the command dial until the desired scene appears in the monitor.

+

Mode dial

k Portrait l Landscape p Child m Sports n Close up o Night Portrait r Night Landscape s Party/Indoor

Command dial Monitor

t Beach/Snow u Sunset v Dusk/Dawn w Pet Portrait x Candlelight y Blossom z Autumn Colors

0 Food

54 Matching Settings to the Subject or Situation (Scene Mode)

k

Portrait

l

Landscape

Use for portraits with soft, naturallooking skin tones. If the subject is far from the background or a telephoto lens is used, background details will be softened to lend the composition a sense of depth.

Use for vivid landscape shots in daylight.

A

Note

The built-in flash and AF-assist illuminator turn off.

p

Child

Use for snapshots of children.

Clothing and background details are vividly rendered, while skin tones remain soft and natural.

Matching Settings to the Subject or Situation (Scene Mode)

55

m

Sports

Fast shutter speeds freeze motion for dynamic sports shots in which the main subject stands out clearly.

A

Note

The built-in flash and AF-assist illuminator turn off.

n

Close up

Use for close-up shots of flowers, insects, and other small objects (a macro lens can be used to focus at very close ranges).

o

Night Portrait

Use for a natural balance between the main subject and the background in portraits taken under low light.

56 Matching Settings to the Subject or Situation (Scene Mode)

r

Night Landscape

Reduce noise and unnatural colors when photographing night landscapes, including street lighting and neon signs.

A

Note

The built-in flash and AF-assist illuminator turn off.

s

Party/Indoor

Capture the effects of indoor background lighting. Use for parties and other indoor scenes.

t

Beach/Snow

Capture the brightness of sunlit expanses of water, snow, or sand.

A

Note

The built-in flash and AF-assist illuminator turn off.

Matching Settings to the Subject or Situation (Scene Mode)

57

u

Sunset

Preserves the deep hues seen in sunsets and sunrises.

A

Note

The built-in flash and AF-assist illuminator turn off.

v

Dusk/Dawn

Preserves the colors seen in the weak natural light before dawn or after sunset.

A

Note

The built-in flash and AF-assist illuminator turn off.

w

Pet Portrait

Use for portraits of active pets.

A

Note

The AF-assist illuminator turns off.

58 Matching Settings to the Subject or Situation (Scene Mode)

x

Candlelight

For photographs taken by candlelight.

A

Note

The built-in flash turns off.

y

Blossom

Use for fields of flowers, orchards in bloom, and other landscapes featuring expanses of blossoms.

A

Note

The built-in flash turns off.

z

Autumn Colors

Captures the brilliant reds and yellows in autumn leaves.

A

Note

The built-in flash turns off.

Matching Settings to the Subject or Situation (Scene Mode)

59

0

Food

Use for vivid photographs of food.

A

Note

For flash photography, press the

M (Y) button to raise the flash (0 95).

A

Preventing Blur

Use a tripod to prevent blur caused by camera shake at slow shutter speeds.

60 Matching Settings to the Subject or Situation (Scene Mode)

Special Effects

Special effects can be used when taking photographs and shooting movies.

The following effects can be selected by rotating the mode dial to q and rotating the command dial until the desired option appears in the monitor.

+

Mode dial

% Night Vision

S Super Vivid

T Pop

U Photo Illustration

' Toy Camera Effect

Command dial Monitor

( Miniature Effect

3 Selective Color

1 Silhouette

2 High Key

3 Low Key

%

Night Vision

Use under conditions of darkness to record monochrome images at high

ISO sensitivities.

A

Note

Pictures may be affected by noise in the form of randomly-spaced bright pixels, fog, or lines. Autofocus is available in live view only; manual focus can be used if the camera is unable to focus. The built-in flash and AFassist illuminator turn off.

Special Effects

61

S

Super Vivid

Overall saturation and contrast are increased for a more vibrant image.

T

Pop

Overall saturation is increased for a more lively image.

U

Photo Illustration

Sharpen outlines and simplify coloring for a poster effect that can be adjusted in live view (

0 66).

A

Note

Movies shot in this mode play back like a slide show made up of a series of stills.

62 Special Effects

'

Toy Camera Effect

Create photos and movies that appear to have been shot with a toy camera. The effect can be adjusted in live view (

0 67).

(

Miniature Effect

Create photos that appear to be pictures of dioramas. Works best when shooting from a high vantage point. Miniature effect movies play back at high speed, compressing about 45 minutes of footage shot at

1920 × 1080/30p into a movie that plays back in about three minutes.

The effect can be adjusted in live

view ( 0 68).

A

Note

Sound is not recorded with movies. The built-in flash and AF-assist illuminator turn off.

3

Selective Color

All colors other than the selected colors are recorded in black and white. The effect can be adjusted in

live view ( 0 69).

A

Note

The built-in flash turns off.

Special Effects

63

1

Silhouette

Silhouette subjects against bright backgrounds.

A

Note

The built-in flash turns off.

2

High Key

Use with bright scenes to create bright images that seem filled with light.

A

Note

The built-in flash turns off.

3

Low Key

Use with dark scenes to create dark, low-key images with prominent highlights.

A

Note

The built-in flash turns off.

64 Special Effects

A

NEF (RAW)

NEF (RAW) recording is not available in %, S, T, U, ', (, and 3 modes.

Pictures taken when an NEF (RAW) or NEF (RAW)+JPEG option is selected in these modes will be recorded as JPEG images. JPEG images created at settings of NEF (RAW)+JPEG will be recorded at the selected

JPEG quality, while images recorded at a setting of NEF (RAW) will be recorded as fine-quality images.

A

U and ( Modes

Autofocus is not available during movie recording. The live view refresh rate will drop, together with the frame rate for continuous release modes; using autofocus during live view photography will disrupt the preview.

A

Preventing Blur

Use a tripod to prevent blur caused by camera shake at slow shutter speeds.

Special Effects

65

Options Available in Live View

Settings for the selected effect are adjusted in the live view display but apply during live view and viewfinder photography and movie recording.

❚❚ U Photo Illustration

1

Select live view.

Rotate the live view switch. The view through the lens will be displayed in the monitor.

2

Adjust outline thickness.

Press

J to display the options shown at right. Press

4 or 2 to make outlines thicker or thinner.

Live view switch

3

Press

J.

Press J to exit when settings are complete. To resume viewfinder photography, rotate the live view switch. The selected settings will continue in effect and will apply to photographs and movies recorded in live view or using the viewfinder.

66 Special Effects

❚❚ ' Toy Camera Effect

1

Select live view.

Rotate the live view switch. The view through the lens will be displayed in the monitor.

Live view switch

2

Adjust options.

Press

J to display the options shown at right. Press

1 or 3 to highlight

Vividness or Vignetting and press 4 or 2 to change. Adjust vividness to make colors more or less saturated, vignetting to control the amount of vignetting.

3

Press

J.

Press J to exit when settings are complete. To resume viewfinder photography, rotate the live view switch. The selected settings will continue in effect and will apply to photographs and movies recorded in live view or using the viewfinder.

Special Effects

67

❚❚ ( Miniature Effect

1

Select live view.

Rotate the live view switch. The view through the lens will be displayed in the monitor.

Live view switch

2

Position the focus point.

Use the multi selector to position the focus point in the area that will be in focus and then press the shutterrelease button halfway to focus. To temporarily clear miniature effect options from the display and enlarge the view in the monitor for precise focus, press

X. Press W (Q) to restore the miniature effect display.

3

Display options.

Press J to display miniature effect options.

4

Adjust options.

Press 4 or 2 to choose the orientation of the area that will be in focus and press

1 or 3 to adjust its width.

68 Special Effects

5

Press

J.

Press

J to exit when settings are complete. To resume viewfinder photography, rotate the live view switch. The selected settings will continue in effect and will apply to photographs and movies recorded in live view or using the viewfinder.

❚❚ 3 Selective Color

1

Select live view.

Rotate the live view switch. The view through the lens will be displayed in the monitor.

Live view switch

2

Display options.

Press

J to display selective color options.

3

Select a color.

Frame an object in the white square in the center of the display and press

1 to choose the color of the object as one that will remain in the final image

Selected color

(the camera may have difficulty detecting unsaturated colors; choose a saturated color). To zoom in on the center of the display for more precise color selection, press X. Press W (Q) to zoom out.

Special Effects

69

4

Choose the color range.

Press

1 or 3 to increase or decrease the range of similar hues that will be included in the final image. Choose from values between 1 and 7; note that higher values may include hues from other colors.

Color range

5

Select additional colors.

To select additional colors, rotate the command dial to highlight another of the three color boxes at the top of the display and repeat

Steps 3 and 4 to select another color. Repeat for a third color if desired. To deselect the highlighted color, press O (To remove all colors, press and hold

O. A confirmation dialog will be displayed; select Yes).

6

Press

J.

Press J to exit when settings are complete. During shooting, only objects of the selected hues will be recorded in color; all others will be recorded in black-and-white. To resume viewfinder photography, rotate the live view switch. The selected settings will continue in effect and will apply to photographs and movies recorded in live view or using the viewfinder.

70 Special Effects

More on Photography

Choosing a Release Mode

To choose how the shutter is released

(release mode), press the

I (E/#) button, then highlight the desired option and press J.

A

Choosing a Release Mode with the Command

Dial

The release mode can also be selected by keeping the I (E/#) button pressed while rotating the command dial. Release the

I (E/#) button to select the highlighted option and return to the information display.

I (E/#) button

Mode

8

!

9

J

Description

Single frame

: Camera takes one photograph each time shutterrelease button is pressed.

Continuous L

: The camera takes photographs at a slow rate while

the shutter-release button is pressed ( 0 72).

Continuous H

: The camera takes photographs at a fast rate while

the shutter-release button is pressed ( 0 72).

Quiet shutter release

: As for single-frame, except that camera noise

is reduced (

0 74).

E

Self-timer

: Take pictures with the self-timer (

0 75).

"

Delayed remote (ML-L3)

: Shutter is released 2 s after shutter-release

button on optional ML-L3 remote control is pressed ( 0 107).

#

Quick-response remote (ML-L3)

: Shutter is released when shutterrelease button on optional ML-L3 remote control is pressed

( 0 107).

More on Photography

71

Continuous Shooting (Burst Mode)

In ! (Continuous L) and 9 (Continuous H) modes, the camera takes photographs continuously while the shutterrelease button is pressed all the way down.

1

Press the

I (E/#) button.

2

Choose a continuous release mode.

Highlight

! (Continuous L) or

9 (Continuous H) and press J.

I (E/#) button

3

Focus.

Frame the shot and focus.

4

Take photographs.

The camera will take photographs while the shutter-release button is pressed all the way down.

72 More on Photography

A

The Memory Buffer

The camera is equipped with a memory buffer for temporary storage, allowing shooting to continue while photographs are being saved to the memory card. Up to 100 photographs can be taken in succession

(an exception is if a shutter speed of 4 seconds or slower is selected in mode S or M, when there is no limit on the number of shots that can be taken in a single burst). Depending on the battery level and the number of images in the buffer, recording may take from a few seconds to a few minutes. If the battery is exhausted while images remain in the buffer, the shutter release will be disabled and the images transferred to the memory card.

A

Frame Rate

For information on the number of photographs can be taken in

continuous release modes, see page 366. Frame rates may drop when

the memory buffer is full or the battery is low.

A

The Built-in Flash

Continuous release modes can not be used with the built-in flash; rotate the mode dial to

j (0 38) or turn the flash off (0 94).

A

Buffer Size

The approximate number of images that can be stored in the memory buffer at current settings is shown in the viewfinder exposure-count display while the shutter-release button is pressed.

More on Photography

73

Quiet Shutter Release

Choose this mode to keep camera noise to a minimum. A beep does not sound when the camera focuses.

1

Press the

I (E/#) button.

2

Select

J (Quiet shutter release).

Highlight J (Quiet shutter release) and press

J.

I (E/#) button

3

Take pictures.

Press the shutter-release button all the way down to shoot.

74 More on Photography

Self-Timer Mode

The self-timer can be used for self-portraits or group shots that include the photographer. Before proceeding, mount the camera on a tripod or place it on a stable, level surface.

1

Press the

I (E/#) button.

2

Select

E (Self-timer) mode.

Highlight

E (Self-timer) and press J.

I (E/#) button

3

Frame the photograph.

More on Photography

75

4

Take the photograph.

Press the shutter-release button halfway to focus, and then press the button the rest of the way down. The self-timer lamp will start to flash and a beep will begin to sound. Two seconds before the photo is taken, the lamp will stop flashing and the beeping will become more rapid. The shutter will be released ten seconds after the timer starts.

Note that the timer may not start or a photograph may not be taken if the camera is unable to focus or in other situations in which the shutter can not be released.

To stop the timer without taking a photograph, turn the camera off.

A

Cover the Viewfinder

To prevent light entering via the viewfinder from appearing in the photograph or interfering with exposure, we recommend that you cover the viewfinder with your hand or other objects such as an

optional eyepiece cap (

0 331) when taking pictures without your eye

to the viewfinder. To attach the cap, remove the rubber eyecup (q) and insert the cap as shown (w).

Rubber eyecup Eyepiece cap

76 More on Photography

A

Using the Built-in Flash

Before taking a photograph with the flash in modes that require the flash to be raised manually, press the

M (Y) button to raise the flash and wait for the

M indicator to be displayed in the viewfinder (0 44).

Shooting will be interrupted if the flash is raised after the self-timer has started.

A

Custom Setting c3 ( Self-Timer)

For information on choosing the duration of the self-timer and the number of shots taken, see Custom Setting c3 (Self-timer;

0 254).

More on Photography

77

Focus (Viewfinder Photography)

This section describes the focus options available when photographs are framed in the viewfinder. Focus can be adjusted automatically or manually (see “Choosing How the

Camera Focuses: Focus Mode,” below). The user can also select the focus point for automatic or manual focus (

0 85) or use

focus lock to focus to recompose photographs after focusing

(

0 86).

Choosing How the Camera Focuses: Focus Mode

Choose from the following focus modes. Note that AF-S and AF-C are available only in modes P, S, A, and M.

AF-A

Option

Auto-servo AF

Description

Camera automatically selects single-servo autofocus if subject is stationary, continuousservo autofocus if subject is moving. Shutter can only be released if camera is able to focus.

AF-S Single-servo AF

For stationary subjects. Focus locks when shutter-release button is pressed halfway.

Shutter can only be released if camera is able to focus.

AF-C

Continuousservo AF

For moving subjects. Camera focuses continuously while shutter-release button is pressed halfway. At default settings, shutter can only be released if camera is able to focus, but Custom Setting a1 (AF-C priority

selection, 0 248) can be changed to allow the

shutter to be released at any time.

MF Manual focus

Focus manually (

0 88).

78 More on Photography

1

Display focus mode options.

Press the

P button, then highlight the current focus mode in the information display and press J.

P button

2

Choose a focus mode.

Highlight a focus mode and press J.

Information display

A

Predictive Focus Tracking

In AF-C mode or when continuous-servo autofocus is selected in AF-A mode, the camera will initiate predictive focus tracking if the subject moves toward the camera while the shutter-release button is pressed halfway. This allows the camera to track focus while attempting to predict where the subject will be when the shutter is released.

D

Continuous-Servo Autofocus

When Focus is selected for Custom Setting a1 (AF-C priority

selection;

0 248) and the camera is in AF-C mode or continuous-servo

autofocus is selected in AF-A mode, the camera gives higher priority to focus response (has a wider focus range) than in AF-S mode, and the shutter may be released before the in-focus indicator ( I) is displayed.

More on Photography

79

A

Getting Good Results with Autofocus

Autofocus does not perform well under the conditions listed below.

The shutter release may be disabled if the camera is unable to focus under these conditions, or the in-focus indicator ( I) may be displayed and the camera may sound a beep, allowing the shutter to be released even when the subject is not in focus. In these cases, focus manually

(

0 88) or use focus lock (0 86) to focus on another subject at the same

distance and then recompose the photograph.

There is little or no contrast between the subject and

the background.

Example

: Subject is the same color as the background.

The focus point contains objects at different distances from the camera.

Example

: Subject is inside a cage.

The subject is dominated by regular geometric

patterns.

Example

: Blinds or a row of windows in a skyscraper.

The focus point contains areas of sharply contrasting brightness.

Example

: Subject is half in the shade.

Background objects appear larger than the subject.

Example

: A building is in the frame behind the subject.

The subject contains many fine details.

Example

: A field of flowers or other subjects that are small or lack variation in brightness.

80 More on Photography

A

The AF-Assist Illuminator

If the subject is poorly lit, the AF-assist illuminator will light automatically to assist the autofocus operation when the shutterrelease button is pressed halfway (some restrictions apply;

0 352). Note that the

illuminator may become hot when used multiple times in quick succession and will turn off automatically to protect the lamp after a period of continuous use. Normal function will resume after a brief pause.

AF-assist illuminator

More on Photography

81

Choosing How the Focus Point Is Selected:

AF-Area Mode

Choose how the focus point for autofocus is selected. Note that d (dynamic-area) and f (3D-tracking) AF-area modes are not available when AF-S is selected for focus mode.

J

Option

c Single-point AF

Dynamic-area AF

(9 points)

K

Dynamic-area AF

(21 points)

L

Dynamic-area AF

(39 points)

Description

For stationary subjects. Focus point is selected manually; camera focuses on subject in selected focus point only.

For non-stationary subjects. In AF-A and AF-C

focus modes

, user selects focus point using multi

selector ( 0 85), but camera will focus based

on information from surrounding focus points if subject briefly leaves selected point.

Number of focus points varies with mode selected:

9-point dynamic-area AF

: Choose when there is time to compose photograph or when photographing subjects that are moving predictably (e.g., runners or race cars on a track).

21-point dynamic-area AF

: Choose when photographing subjects that are moving unpredictably (e.g., players at a football game).

39-point dynamic-area AF

: Choose when photographing subjects that are moving quickly and are hard to keep in frame (e.g., birds).

82 More on Photography

Option

f 3D-tracking e Auto-area AF

Description

Quickly compose pictures with subjects that are moving erratically from side to side (e.g., tennis players). In AF-A and AF-C focus modes, user selects focus point using multi selector

( 0 85). If subject moves after camera has

focused, camera uses 3D-tracking to select new focus point and keep focus locked on original subject while shutter-release button is pressed halfway.

Camera automatically detects subject and selects focus point.

1

Display AF-area mode options.

Press the P button, then highlight the current AF-area mode in the information display and press

J.

P button

2

Choose an AF-area mode.

Highlight an option and press J.

Information display

More on Photography

83

A

AF-Area Mode

AF-area mode selections made in shooting modes other than P, S, A, or

M

are reset when another shooting mode is selected.

A

3D-Tracking

If subject leaves the viewfinder, remove your finger from the shutterrelease button and recompose the photograph with the subject in the selected focus point. Note that when the shutter-release button is pressed halfway, the colors in the area surrounding the focus point are stored in the camera. Consequently 3D-tracking may not produce the desired results with subjects that are the same color as the background.

84 More on Photography

Focus Point Selection

In manual focus mode or when autofocus is combined with AFarea modes other than e (Auto-area AF), you can choose from

39 focus points, making it possible to compose photographs with the main subject almost anywhere in the frame.

1

Choose an AF-area mode other than

e (Auto-area AF;

0

83

)

.

2

Return to the shooting display.

Press P to return to the shooting display.

P button

3

Select the focus point.

Use the multi selector to select the focus point in the viewfinder or information display while the standby timer is on. Press J to select the center focus point.

Focus point

More on Photography

85

Focus Lock

Focus lock can be used to change the composition after focusing in AF-A, AF-S, and AF-C focus modes (

0 78), making it possible to

focus on a subject that will not be in a focus point in the final composition. If the camera is unable to focus using autofocus

(

0 80), focus lock can also be used to recompose the

photograph after focusing on another object at the same distance as your original subject. Focus lock is most effective when an option other than e (Auto-area AF) is selected for AF-

area mode (

0 82).

1

Focus.

Position the subject in the selected focus point and press the shutter-release button halfway to initiate focus. Check that the infocus indicator ( I) appears in the viewfinder.

86 More on Photography

2

Lock focus.

AF-A and AF-C focus modes

: With the shutter-release button pressed halfway (q), press the A (L) button

(w) to lock focus. Focus will remain locked while the

A (L) button is pressed, even if you later remove your finger from the shutter-release button.

Shutter-release button

A (L) button

AF-S focus mode

: Focus will lock automatically when the in-focus indicator ( I) appears, and remain locked until you remove your finger from the shutter-release button. Focus can also be locked by pressing the

A (L) button (see above).

3

Recompose the photograph and shoot.

Focus will remain locked between shots if you keep the shutter-release button pressed halfway (AF-S) or keep the A (L) button pressed, allowing several photographs in succession to be taken at the same focus setting.

Do not change the distance between the camera and the subject while focus lock is in effect. If the subject moves, focus again at the new distance.

A

Autoexposure Lock

Pressing the

A (L) button in Step 2 also locks exposure (0 127).

More on Photography

87

Manual Focus

Manual focus can be used when autofocus is not available or

does not produce the desired results ( 0 80).

1

Select manual focus.

If the lens is equipped with an A-M, M/A-M, or A/M-M mode switch, slide the switch to M.

A-M mode switch M/A-M mode switch

If the lens is not equipped a focus-mode switch, select MF

(manual focus) for Focus mode (

0 78).

2

Focus.

To focus manually, adjust the lens focus ring until the image displayed on the clear matte field in the viewfinder is in focus. Photographs can be taken at any time, even when the image is not in focus.

A

AF-P DX NIKKOR 18–55mm f/3.5–5.6G and G VR Lenses

When an AF-P DX NIKKOR 18–55mm f/3.5–5.6G VR or AF-P DX NIKKOR

18–55mm f/3.5–5.6G lens is used in manual focus mode, the in-focus indicator ( I) will flash in the viewfinder (or in live view, the focus point will flash in the monitor) to warn that continuing to rotate the focus ring in the current direction will not bring the subject into focus.

88 More on Photography

❚❚ The Electronic Rangefinder

If the lens has a maximum aperture of f/5.6 or faster, the viewfinder focus indicator can be used to confirm whether the subject in the selected focus point is in focus (the focus point can be selected from any of the 39 focus points). After positioning the subject in the selected focus point, press the shutter-release button halfway and rotate the lens focus ring until the in-focus indicator ( I) is displayed.

Note that with the subjects listed on page 80, the in-focus

indicator may sometimes be displayed when the subject is not in focus; confirm focus in the viewfinder before shooting.

A

Selecting Manual Focus with the Camera

If the lens supports M/A (autofocus with manual override) or A/M (autofocus with manual override/AF priority), manual focus can also be selected by setting the camera focus mode to MF (manual focus;

0 78).

Focus can then be adjusted manually, regardless of the mode selected with the lens.

A

Focal Plane Position

The position of the focal plane is indicated by the focal plane mark on the camera body. The distance between the lens mounting flange and the focal plane is 46.5 mm (1.83 in.).

46.5 mm

Focal plane mark

More on Photography

89

Image Quality and Size

Together, image quality and size determine how much space each photograph occupies on the memory card. Larger, higher quality images can be printed at larger sizes but also require more memory, meaning that fewer such images can be stored on the memory card (

0 399).

Image Quality

Choose a file format and compression ratio (image quality).

Option

NEF (RAW) +

JPEG fine

NEF (RAW) +

JPEG normal

NEF (RAW) +

JPEG basic

NEF (RAW)

JPEG fine

JPEG normal

JPEG basic

File type

NEF/

JPEG

NEF

JPEG

Description

Two images are recorded: one NEF (RAW) image and one fine-quality JPEG image.

Two images are recorded: one NEF (RAW) image and one normal-quality JPEG image.

Two images are recorded: one NEF (RAW) image and one basic-quality JPEG image.

Raw data from the image sensor are saved without additional processing. Settings such as white balance and contrast can be adjusted after shooting.

Record JPEG images at a compression ratio of roughly 1 : 4 (fine quality).

Record JPEG images at a compression ratio of roughly 1 : 8 (normal quality).

Record JPEG images at a compression ratio of roughly 1 : 16 (basic quality).

A

NEF (RAW) + JPEG

When photographs taken at NEF (RAW) + JPEG are viewed on the camera, only the JPEG image will be displayed. When photographs taken at these settings are deleted, both NEF and JPEG images will be deleted.

90 More on Photography

1

Display image quality options.

Press the

P button, then highlight the current image quality in the information display and press J.

P button

2

Choose a file type.

Highlight an option and press

J.

Information display

A

NEF (RAW) Images

Note that the option selected for image size does not affect the size of

NEF (RAW) images. White balance bracketing (

0 148), high dynamic

range (HDR,

0 135), and Date stamp (0 256) are not available at

image quality settings of NEF (RAW) or NEF (RAW)+JPEG.

NEF (RAW) images can be viewed on the camera or using software

such as ViewNX 2 or Capture NX-D ( 0 210). JPEG copies of NEF (RAW)

images can be created using the NEF (RAW) processing option in the

retouch menu ( 0 289).

More on Photography

91

Image Size

Choose a size for JPEG images:

Image size

# Large

$ Medium

% Small

Size (pixels)

6000 × 4000

4496 × 3000

Print size (cm/in.)

*

50.8 × 33.9/20 × 13.3

38.1 × 25.4/15.0 × 10

2992 × 2000 25.3 × 16.9/10 × 6.7

* Approximate size when printed at 300 dpi. Print size in inches equals image size in pixels divided by printer resolution in dots per inch (dpi;

1 inch=approximately 2.54 cm).

1

Display image size options.

Press the P button, then highlight the current image size in the information display and press

J.

P button

2

Choose an image size.

Highlight an option and press

J.

Information display

92 More on Photography

Using the Built-in Flash

The camera supports a variety of flash modes for photographing poorly lit or backlit subjects.

Auto Pop-up Modes

In i, k, p, n, o, s, w, S, T, U, and ' modes, the built-in flash automatically pops up and fires as required.

1

Choose a flash mode.

Keeping the

M (Y) button pressed, rotate the command dial until the desired flash mode appears in the information display.

+

M (Y) button

Command dial Information display

2

Take pictures.

The flash will pop up as required when the shutterrelease button is pressed halfway, and fire when a photograph is taken. If the

flash does not pop up automatically,

DO NOT

attempt to raise it by hand. Failure to

observe this precaution could damage the flash.

More on Photography

93

❚❚ Flash Modes

The following flash modes are available:

No (auto): When lighting is poor or the subject is backlit, the flash pops up automatically when the shutter-release button is pressed halfway and fires as required. Not available in o mode.

Njo (auto + red-eye reduction): Use for portraits. The flash pops up and fires as required, but before it fires the redeye reduction lamp lights to help reduce “red-eye.” Not available in o mode.

Njr (auto slow sync + red-eye reduction): As for auto with red-eye reduction, except that slow shutter speeds are used to capture background lighting. Use for portraits taken at night or under low light. Available in o mode.

Nr (auto slow sync): Slow shutter speeds are used to capture background lighting in shots taken at night or under low light. Available in o mode.

j (flash off): The flash does not fire.

A

The Information Display

Flash mode can also be selected in the information display (

0 8).

94 More on Photography

Manual Pop-up Modes

In P, S, A, M, and 0 modes, the flash must be raised manually. The flash will not fire if it is not raised.

1

Raise the flash.

Press the

M (Y) button to raise the flash.

M (Y) button

2

Choose a flash mode (P, S, A, and M modes only).

Keeping the

M (Y) button pressed, rotate the command dial until the desired flash mode appears in the information display.

+

M (Y) button

Command dial Information display

3

Take pictures.

The flash will fire whenever a picture is taken.

More on Photography

95

❚❚ Flash Modes

The following flash modes are available:

N (fill flash): The flash fires with every shot.

Nj (red-eye reduction): Use for portraits. The flash fires with every shot, but before it fires, the red-eye reduction lamp lights to help reduce “red-eye.” Not available in 0 mode.

Njp (slow sync + red-eye): As for “red-eye reduction”, above, except that shutter speed slows automatically to capture background lighting at night or under low light. Use when you want to include background lighting in portraits.

Not available in modes S, M, and 0.

Np (slow sync): As for “fill flash”, above, except that shutter speed slows automatically to capture background lighting at night or under low light. Use when you want to capture both subject and background. Not available in modes S, M, and 0.

Nt (rear-curtain + slow sync): As for “rear-curtain sync”, below, except that shutter speed slows automatically to capture background lighting at night or under low light. Use when you want to capture both subject and background. Not available in modes S, M, and 0.

Nq (rear-curtain sync): The flash fires just before the shutter closes, creating a stream of light behind moving light sources as shown below at right. Not available in modes P, A, and 0.

Front-curtain sync

96 More on Photography

Rear-curtain sync

A

Lowering the Built-in Flash

To save power when the flash is not in use, press it gently downward until the latch clicks into place.

A

The Built-in Flash

For information on the lenses that can be used with the built-in flash,

see page 320. Remove lens hoods to prevent shadows. The flash has a

minimum range of 0.6 m (2 ft) and can not be used in the macro range of zoom lenses with a macro function.

The shutter release may be briefly disabled to protect the flash after it has been used for several consecutive shots. The flash can be used again after a short pause.

More on Photography

97

A

Shutter Speeds Available with the Built-in Flash

Shutter speed is restricted to the following ranges when the built-in flash is used:

Mode

i, p, n, s, w, 0, S, T, U, ' k o

P

, S, A

M

Shutter speed

1

/

200

1

/

60 s

1

/

200

1

/

30 s

1

/

200

–1 s

1

/

200

–30 s

1

/

200

–30 s, Bulb, Time

A

Aperture, Sensitivity, and Flash Range

Flash range varies with sensitivity (ISO equivalency) and aperture.

Aperture at ISO equivalent of Approximate range

100 200 400 800 1600 3200 6400 12800 m ft

1.4

2 2.8

4 5.6

8 11 16 1.0–8.5

3ft 4in.–27ft 10in.

2 2.8

4 5.6

8 11 16 22 0.7–6.0

2ft 4in.–19ft 8in.

2.8

4 5.6

8 11 16 22 32 0.6–4.2

4 5.6

8 11 16 22 32 — 0.6–3.0

5.6

8 11 16 22 32 — — 0.6–2.1

8 11 16 22 32 — — — 0.6–1.5

11 16 22 32 — — — — 0.6–1.1

16 22 32 — — — — — 0.6–0.7

2ft–13ft 9in.

2ft–9ft 10in.

2ft–6ft 10in.

2ft–4ft 11in.

2ft–3ft 7in.

2ft–2ft 4in.

98 More on Photography

ISO Sensitivity

The camera’s sensitivity to light can be adjusted according to the amount of light available. The higher the ISO sensitivity, the less light needed to make an exposure, allowing higher shutter speeds or smaller apertures. Choosing Auto allows the camera to set ISO sensitivity automatically in response to lighting conditions; to use auto in P, S, A, and M modes, select Auto ISO

sensitivity control for the ISO sensitivity settings item in the shooting menu (

0 241).

Mode

i, j, %

P

, S, A, M

Other shooting modes

ISO sensitivity

Auto

100–25600 in steps of

1

/

3

EV

Auto; 100–25600 in steps of

1

/

3

EV

1

Display ISO sensitivity options.

Press the P button, then highlight the current ISO sensitivity in the information display and press

J.

P button

Information display

More on Photography

99

2

Choose an ISO sensitivity.

Highlight an option and press

J.

100 More on Photography

Interval Timer Photography

The camera is equipped to take photographs automatically at preset intervals.

D

Before Shooting

Before beginning interval timer photography, take a test shot at current settings and view the results in the monitor. To ensure that shooting starts at the desired time, check that the camera clock is set correctly (

0 275).

Use of a tripod is recommended. Mount the camera on a tripod before shooting begins. To ensure that shooting is not interrupted, be sure the battery is fully charged.

1

Select Interval timer shooting.

Highlight Interval timer shooting in the shooting menu and press 2 to display interval timer settings.

More on Photography

101

2

Adjust interval timer settings.

Choose a start option, interval, number of shots per interval, and exposure smoothing option.

• To choose a start option:

Highlight Start options and press

2.

Highlight an option and

press

J.

To start shooting immediately, select Now. To start shooting at a chosen date and time, select Choose start

day and start time, then choose the date and time and press J.

• To choose the interval between shots:

Highlight Interval and press

2.

Choose an interval (hours, minutes, and seconds) and press

J.

102 More on Photography

• To choose the number of intervals:

Highlight Number of times and press

2.

Choose the number of intervals and press

J.

• To enable or disable exposure smoothing:

Highlight Exposure

smoothing and press

2.

Highlight an option and press

J.

Selecting On allows the camera to adjust exposure to match previous shot in modes other than M (note that exposure smoothing only takes effect in mode M if auto ISO sensitivity control is on).

More on Photography

103

3

Start shooting.

Highlight Start and press

J. The first series of shots will be taken at the specified starting time, or after about

3 s if Now was selected for Start

options in Step 2. Shooting will continue at the selected interval until all shots have been taken; while shooting is in progress, the memory card access lamp will flash at regular intervals. Note that because shutter speed and the time needed to record the image to the memory card may vary from shot to shot, intervals may be skipped if the camera is still in the process of recording the previous interval; choose an interval longer than the slowest anticipated shutter speed. If shooting can not proceed at current settings (for example, if a shutter speed of “Bulb” or

“Time” is currently selected in shooting mode M, the interval is zero, or the start time is in less than a minute), a warning will be displayed in the monitor.

104 More on Photography

❚❚ Pausing Interval Timer Photography

Interval timer photography can be paused between intervals by pressing

J. To resume shooting:

Starting Now

Highlight Restart and press

J.

Starting at a Specified Time

For Start options, highlight Choose start

day and start time and press

2.

Choose a starting date and time and press

J.

Highlight Restart and press

J.

❚❚ Ending Interval Timer Shooting

To end interval timer photography and resume normal shooting before all the photos are taken, pause shooting and select Off in the interval timer menu.

More on Photography

105

❚❚ No Photograph

The camera will skip the current interval if any of the following situations persist for eight seconds or more after the interval was due to start: the photograph or photographs for the previous interval have yet to be taken, the memory card is full, or the camera is unable to focus in AF-S or when single-servo AF is selected in AF-A (note that the camera focuses again before each shot). Shooting will resume with the next interval.

D

Out of Memory

If the memory card is full, the interval timer will remain active but no pictures will be taken. Resume shooting (

0 105) after deleting some

pictures or turning the camera off and inserting another memory card.

A

Cover the Viewfinder

To prevent light entering via the viewfinder from appearing in the photograph or interfering with exposure, we recommend that you cover the viewfinder with your hand or other objects such as an

optional eyepiece cap ( 0 331) before taking pictures without your eye

to the viewfinder (

0 76).

A

Other Settings

Settings can not be adjusted during interval timer photography.

Regardless of the release mode selected, the camera takes one photograph at each interval; in mode J, camera noise will be reduced.

Bracketing (

0 148) and high dynamic range (HDR; 0 135) can not be

used.

A

Interrupting Interval Timer Photography

To interrupt interval timer shooting, turn the camera off or rotate the mode dial to a new setting. Returning the monitor to the storage position does not interrupt interval timer shooting.

106 More on Photography

Remote Control Photography

Using an Optional ML-L3 Remote Control

The optional ML-L3 remote control (

0 332) can be used to

reduce camera shake or for self-portraits. Before proceeding, mount the camera on a tripod or place it on a stable, level surface.

1

Press the

I (E/#) button.

2

Select a remote control mode.

Highlight " (Delayed remote

(ML-L3)) or

# (Quick-response

remote (ML-L3)) and press

J.

3

Frame the photograph.

Check focus by pressing the shutterrelease button halfway.

I (E/#) button

More on Photography

107

4

Take the photograph.

From a distance of 5 m (16 ft) or less, aim the transmitter on the ML-L3 at either of the infrared receivers on the camera (

0 1, 2) and press the ML-L3

shutter-release button. In delayed

remote mode, the self-timer lamp will light for about two seconds before the shutter is released. In

quick-response remote mode, the self-timer lamp will flash after the shutter has been released.

Note that the timer may not start or a photograph may not be taken if the camera is unable to focus or in other situations in which the shutter can not be released.

A

Before Using the ML-L3 Remote Control

Before using the ML-L3 for the first time, remove the clear plastic battery-insulator sheet.

A

Cover the Viewfinder

To prevent light entering via the viewfinder from appearing in the photograph or interfering with exposure, we recommend that you cover the viewfinder with your hand or other objects such as an

optional eyepiece cap ( 0 331) before taking pictures without your eye

to the viewfinder ( 0 76).

A

The Camera Shutter-Release Button/Other Remote Control Devices

If an ML-L3 remote release mode is selected and the shutter is released by any means other than an ML-L3 remote control (for example, the camera shutter-release button or the shutter button on an optional remote cord or wireless remote controller), the camera will function in single-frame release mode.

108 More on Photography

A

Exiting Remote Control Mode

Remote control mode is cancelled automatically if no photograph is taken before the time selected for Custom Setting c4 (Remote on

duration (ML-L3), 0 254). Remote control mode will also be

cancelled if the camera is turned off, a two-button reset is performed

(

0 110), or shooting options are reset using Reset shooting menu.

A

Using the Built-in Flash

Before taking a photograph with the flash in manual pop-up modes

(

0 95), press the M (Y) button to raise the flash and wait for the M

indicator to be displayed in the viewfinder ( 0 44). Shooting will be

interrupted if the flash is raised after the shutter-release button on the

ML-L3 is pressed. If the flash is required, the camera will only respond to the ML-L3 shutter-release button once the flash has charged. In auto pop-up modes, the flash will begin charging when a remote control mode is selected; once the flash is charged, it will automatically pop up and fire when required.

A

Wireless Remote Controllers

Remote control is also available with various combinations of WR-R10,

WR-T10, and WR-1 wireless remote controllers ( 0 332), when the

shutter-release buttons on the wireless remote controllers perform the same functions as the camera shutter-release button. For more information, see the manual provided with the remote controllers.

More on Photography

109

Restoring Default Settings

The camera settings listed below

and on page 112 can be restored

to default values by holding the

G and R buttons down together for more than two seconds (these buttons are

G button R button marked by a green dot). The information display turns off briefly while settings are reset.

❚❚ Settings Accessible from the Information Display

Option

Image quality

Image size

Auto bracketing

P, S, A, M

HDR (high dynamic range)

P, S, A, M

Active D-Lighting

P, S, A, M

White balance

P, S, A, M

ISO sensitivity

P, S, A, M

Other shooting modes

Picture Control settings

P, S, A, M

1 Fine-tuning is also reset.

2 Current Picture Control only.

Default

JPEG normal

Large

Off

Off 135

Auto

Auto

1

100

Auto

Unmodified

2

148

133

137

99

155

0

90

92

110 More on Photography

Option

Focus mode

Viewfinder

Shooting modes other than

%

Live view/movie

AF-area mode

Viewfinder n, x, 0, 1, 2, 3 m, w i, j, k, l, p, o, r, s, t, u, v, y, z, S,

T, U, ', 3, P, S, A, M

Live view/movie k, l, p, o, s, t, u, v, x, y, z m, r, w, %, S, T, U, ', 3, 1, 2, 3, P, S,

A, M n, 0

Metering

P, S, A, M

Flash mode i, k, p, n, w, S, T, ' o s

U

P, S, A, M

Flash compensation h, P, S, A, M

Exposure compensation h, %, P, S, A, M

Default

AF-A

AF-S

Single-point AF

Dynamic-area AF (39 points)

Auto-area AF

Face-priority AF

Wide-area AF

Normal-area AF

Matrix metering

Auto

Auto slow sync

Auto+red-eye reduction

Flash off

Fill flash

Off

Off

0

78

164

82

166

125

94,

96

131

129

More on Photography

111

❚❚ Other Settings

Option

NEF (RAW) recording

Exposure delay mode

Release mode m, w

Other shooting modes

Focus point

AE/AF lock hold

Shooting modes other than i and j

Flexible program

P

Special effects mode

U

Thickness

Default

14-bit

Off

Continuous H

Single frame

Center

Off

Off

'

Vividness 0

Vignetting 0

(

Orientation

Width

3

Landscape

Normal

Color

Color range

Off

3

66

67

68

0

240

254

71

85

267

116

69

112 More on Photography

P, S, A, and M Modes

Shutter Speed and Aperture

P

, S, A, and M modes offer different degrees of control over shutter speed and aperture:

P

S

A

M

(

(

Mode

Programmed auto

0 115)

Shutter-priority auto

0 117)

Aperture-priority auto

(

0 118)

Manual ( 0 119)

Description

Recommended for snapshots and in other situations in which there is little time to adjust camera settings. Camera sets shutter speed and aperture for optimal exposure.

Use to freeze or blur motion. User chooses shutter speed; camera selects aperture for best results.

Use to blur background or bring both foreground and background into focus.

User chooses aperture; camera selects shutter speed for best results.

User controls both shutter speed and aperture. Set shutter speed to “Bulb” or

“Time” for long time-exposures.

P, S, A, and M Modes

113

A

Shutter Speed and Aperture

Shutter speed and aperture are shown in the viewfinder and information display.

Shutter speed

Aperture

Fast shutter speeds (

1

/

1600 s in this example) freeze motion.

Slow shutter speeds (here 1 s) blur motion.

Large apertures (such as f/5.6; remember, the lower the f-number, the larger the aperture) blur details in front of and behind the main subject.

Small apertures (f/22 in this case) bring both background and foreground into focus.

114 P, S, A, and M Modes

Mode P (Programmed Auto)

This mode is recommended for snapshots or whenever you want to leave the camera in charge of shutter speed and aperture. The camera automatically adjusts shutter speed and aperture for optimal exposure in most situations.

Mode dial

To take pictures in programmed auto mode, rotate the mode dial to P.

P, S, A, and M Modes

115

A

Flexible Program

In mode P, different combinations of shutter speed and aperture can be selected by rotating the command dial (“flexible program”). Rotate the dial right for large apertures (low f-numbers) and fast shutter speeds, left for small apertures (high f-numbers) and slow shutter speeds. All combinations produce the same exposure.

Rotate right to blur background details or freeze motion.

Rotate left to increase depth of field or blur motion.

Command dial

While flexible program is in effect, a

U (R) indicator appears in the viewfinder and information display. To restore default shutter speed and aperture settings, rotate the command dial until the indicator is no longer displayed, choose another mode, or turn the camera off.

116 P, S, A, and M Modes

Mode S (Shutter-Priority Auto)

This mode lets you control shutter speed: choose fast shutter speeds to “freeze” motion, slow shutter speeds to suggest motion by blurring moving objects. The camera automatically adjusts aperture for optimal exposure.

Fast shutter speeds (e.g.,

1

/

1600 s) freeze motion.

To choose a shutter speed:

Slow shutter speeds (e.g., 1 s) blur motion.

1

Rotate the mode dial to S.

Mode dial

2

Choose a shutter speed.

Rotate the command dial to choose the desired shutter speed: rotate right for faster speeds, left for slower speeds.

Command dial

P, S, A, and M Modes

117

Mode A (Aperture-Priority Auto)

In this mode, you can adjust aperture to control depth of field

(the distance in front of and behind the main subject that appears to be in focus). The camera automatically adjusts shutter speed for optimal exposure.

Large apertures (low f-numbers, e.g. f/5.6) blur details in front of and behind the main subject.

Small apertures (high f-numbers, e.g. f/22) bring the foreground and background into focus.

To choose an aperture:

1

Rotate the mode dial to A.

Mode dial

2

Choose an aperture.

Rotate the command dial left for larger apertures (lower fnumbers), right for smaller apertures (higher f-numbers).

118 P, S, A, and M Modes

Command dial

Mode M (Manual)

In manual mode, you control both shutter speed and aperture.

Shutter speeds of “Bulb” and “Time” are available for long timeexposures of moving lights, the stars, night scenery, or fireworks

(

0 121).

1

Rotate the mode dial to M.

Mode dial

P, S, A, and M Modes

119

2

Choose aperture and shutter speed.

Checking the exposure indicator (see below), adjust shutter speed and aperture. Shutter speed is selected by rotating the command dial (right for faster speeds, left for slower). To adjust aperture, keep the E (N) button pressed while rotating the command dial (left for larger apertures/lower f-numbers and right for smaller apertures/higher f-numbers).

Shutter speed

Command dial

Aperture

E (N) button

Command dial

A

The Exposure Indicator

If a CPU lens is attached ( 0 314) and a shutter speed other than “Bulb”

or “Time” is selected, the exposure indicator in the viewfinder and information display shows whether the photograph would be under- or over-exposed at current settings.

Optimal exposure Underexposed by

1

/

3

EV Overexposed by over 2 EV

120 P, S, A, and M Modes

Long Time-Exposures (M Mode Only)

Select the following shutter speeds for long time-exposures of moving lights, the stars, night scenery, or fireworks.

• Bulb (

A): The shutter remains open while the shutter-release button is pressed all the way down. To

Length of exposure: 35 s

Aperture: f/25

prevent blur, use a tripod or an

optional wireless remote controller (

0 332) or remote cord

(

0 333).

• Time (

&): Start the exposure using the shutter-release button on the camera or on an optional remote control, remote cord, or wireless remote controller. The shutter remains open until the button is pressed a second time.

Before proceeding, mount the camera on a tripod or place it on a stable, level surface. To prevent light entering via the viewfinder from appearing in the photograph or interfering with exposure, we recommend that you cover the viewfinder with your hand or other objects such as an optional eyepiece cap

(

0 331) before taking pictures without your eye to the

viewfinder (

0 76). To prevent loss of power before the exposure

is complete, use a fully charged battery. Note that noise (bright spots, randomly-spaced bright pixels, or fog) may be present in long exposures. Bright spots and fog can be reduced by choosing On for Long exposure NR in the shooting menu

(

0 243).

P, S, A, and M Modes

121

❚❚ Bulb

1

Rotate the mode dial to M.

Mode dial

2

Choose the shutter speed.

Rotate the command dial to choose a shutter speed of Bulb (

A).

Command dial

3

Take the photograph.

After focusing, press the shutter-release button on the camera, optional wireless remote controller or remote cord all the way down. Take your finger from the shutter-release button when the exposure is complete.

122 P, S, A, and M Modes

❚❚ Time

1

Rotate the mode dial to M.

Mode dial

2

Choose the shutter speed.

Rotate the command dial left to choose a shutter speed of “Time” (

&).

Command dial

3

Open the shutter.

After focusing, press the shutter-release button on the camera or optional remote control, remote cord, or wireless remote controller all the way down.

4

Close the shutter.

Repeat the operation performed in Step 3.

P, S, A, and M Modes

123

A

ML-L3 Remote Controls

If you will be using an ML-L3 remote control, select one of the

following remote control modes as described on page 107:

" (Delayed remote (ML-L3)) or # (Quick-response remote

(ML-L3)). Note that if you are using an ML-L3 remote control, pictures will be taken in “Time” mode even when “Bulb”/ A is selected for shutter speed. The exposure starts when the shutter-release button on the remote control is pressed and ends after 30 minutes or when the button is pressed again.

124 P, S, A, and M Modes

Exposure

Metering

Choose how the camera sets exposure.

L Matrix metering

M

Method

Center-weighted metering

N Spot metering

Description

Produces natural results in most situations. The camera meters a wide area of the frame and sets exposure according to tone distribution, color, composition, and distance.

Classic meter for portraits. Camera meters entire frame but assigns greatest weight to center area.

Recommended when using filters with an exposure factor (filter factor) over 1×.

Choose this mode to ensure that subject will be correctly exposed, even when background is much brighter or darker. Camera meters current focus point; use to meter off-center subjects.

1

Display metering options.

Press the

P button, then highlight the current metering method in the information display and press J.

P button

Information display

P, S, A, and M Modes

125

2

Choose a metering method.

Highlight an option and press

J.

A

Spot Metering

If e (Auto-area AF) is selected for AF-area mode during viewfinder photography (

0 82), the camera will meter the center focus point.

126 P, S, A, and M Modes

Autoexposure Lock

Use autoexposure lock to recompose photographs after using

M (Center-weighted metering) and N (Spot metering) to meter exposure; note that autoexposure lock is not available in i or j mode.

1

Meter exposure.

Press the shutter-release button halfway.

2

Lock exposure.

With the shutter-release button pressed halfway (q) and the subject positioned in the focus point, press the A (L) button (w) to lock exposure.

Shutter-release button

While exposure lock is in effect, an AE-L indicator will appear in the viewfinder.

3

Recompose the photograph.

Keeping the

A (L) button pressed, recompose the photograph and shoot.

A (L) button

P, S, A, and M Modes

127

A

Adjusting Shutter Speed and Aperture

While exposure lock is in effect, the following settings can be adjusted without altering the metered value for exposure:

Mode

Programmed auto

Shutter-priority auto

Aperture-priority auto

Setting

Shutter speed and aperture

(flexible program;

0 116)

Shutter speed

Aperture

The metering method itself can not be changed while exposure lock is in effect.

128 P, S, A, and M Modes

Exposure Compensation

Exposure compensation is used to alter exposure from the value suggested by the camera, making pictures brighter or darker

(

0 367). In general, positive values make the subject brighter

while negative values make it darker. It is most effective when used with

M (Center-weighted metering) or N (Spot

metering) (

0 125).

–1 EV No exposure compensation

+1 EV

To choose a value for exposure compensation, keep the E (N) button pressed and rotate the command dial until the desired value is selected in the viewfinder or information display.

+

E (N) button

Command dial

–0.3 EV

Information display

+2 EV

P, S, A, and M Modes

129

Normal exposure can be restored by setting exposure compensation to ±0. Except in h and % modes, exposure compensation is not reset when the camera is turned off (in h and % modes, exposure compensation will be reset when another mode is selected or the camera is turned off ).

A

The Information Display

Exposure compensation options can also be accessed from the information display

( 0 10).

A

Mode M

In mode M, exposure compensation affects only the exposure indicator.

A

Using a Flash

When a flash is used, exposure compensation affects both background exposure and flash level.

A

Bracketing

For information on automatically varying exposure over a series of

shots, see page 148.

130 P, S, A, and M Modes

Flash Compensation

Flash compensation is used to alter flash output from the level suggested by the camera, changing the brightness of the main subject relative to the background. Flash output can be increased to make the main subject appear brighter, or reduced

to prevent unwanted highlights or reflections (

0 368).

Keep the M (Y) and E (N) buttons pressed and rotate the command dial until the desired value is selected in the viewfinder or information display. In general, positive values make the main subject seem brighter while negative values make it seem darker. Normal flash output can be restored by setting flash compensation to ±0. Except in h mode, flash compensation is not reset when the camera is turned off (in h mode, flash compensation will be reset when another mode is selected or the camera is turned off ).

M (Y) button

E (N) button

–0.3 EV

+

Command dial Information display

+1 EV

P, S, A, and M Modes

131

A

The Information Display

Flash compensation options can also be accessed from the information display

( 0 10).

A

Optional Flash Units

Flash compensation is also available with optional flash units that

support the Nikon Creative Lighting System (CLS; see page 323). The

flash compensation selected with the optional flash unit is added to the flash compensation selected with the camera.

132 P, S, A, and M Modes

Preserving Detail in Highlights and

Shadows

Active D-Lighting

Active D-Lighting preserves details in highlights and shadows, creating photographs with natural contrast. Use for high contrast scenes, for example when photographing brightly lit outdoor scenery through a door or window or taking pictures of shaded subjects on a sunny day. Active D-Lighting is not recommended in mode M; in other modes, it is most effective when used with

L (Matrix metering; 0 125).

Active D-Lighting:

! Off

Active D-Lighting:

Y Auto

1

Display Active D-Lighting options.

Press the P button, then highlight

Active D-Lighting in the information display and press J.

P button

Information display

P, S, A, and M Modes

133

2

Choose an option.

Highlight an option and press

J

( 0 367).

D

Active D-Lighting

Noise (randomly-spaced bright pixels, fog, or lines) may appear in photographs taken with Active D-Lighting. Uneven shading may be visible with some subjects.

A

“ Active D-Lighting” Versus “D-Lighting”

Active D-Lighting adjusts exposure before shooting to optimize the dynamic range, while the D-Lighting option in the retouch menu

( 0 294) brightens shadows in images after shooting.

A

Bracketing

For information on automatically varying Active D-Lighting over a

series of shots, see page 148.

134 P, S, A, and M Modes

High Dynamic Range (HDR)

High Dynamic Range (HDR) combines two exposures to form a single image that captures a wide range of tones from shadows to highlights, even with high-contrast subjects. HDR is most effective when used with

L (Matrix metering) (0 125). It can

not be used to record NEF (RAW) images. While HDR is in effect, the flash can not be used and continuous shooting is not available.

+

First exposure (darker) Second exposure

(brighter)

1

Display HDR (high dynamic range) options.

Press the P button, then highlight

HDR (high dynamic range) in the information display and press

J.

Combined HDR image

P button

Information display

P, S, A, and M Modes

135

2

Choose an option.

Highlight v Auto, 2 Extra high,

S High, T Normal, U Low, or

6 Off and press J.

When an option other than

6 Off is selected, u will be displayed in the viewfinder.

3

Frame a photograph, focus, and shoot.

The camera takes two exposures when the shutter-release button is pressed all the way down. “ l u” will flash in the viewfinder while the images are combined; no photographs can be taken until recording is complete. HDR turns off automatically after the photograph is taken; to turn off HDR before shooting, rotate the mode dial to a setting other than P, S, A, or M.

D

Framing HDR Photographs

The edges of the image may be cropped out. The desired results may not be achieved if the camera or subject moves during shooting. Use of a tripod is recommended. Depending on the scene, the effect may not be visible, shadows may appear around bright objects, or halos may appear around dark objects. Uneven shading may be visible with some subjects.

136 P, S, A, and M Modes

White Balance

White balance ensures that colors are unaffected by the color of the light source. Auto white balance is recommended for most light sources; other values can be selected if necessary according to the type of source:

Option

L Preset manual

Description

v Auto

Automatic white balance adjustment.

Recommended in most situations.

J Incandescent

I

Fluorescent

Use under incandescent lighting.

Use with the light sources listed on page 138.

H Direct sunlight

Use with subjects lit by direct sunlight.

N

Flash

G Cloudy

M Shade

Use with the flash.

Use in daylight under overcast skies.

Use in daylight with subjects in the shade.

Measure white balance or copy white balance from existing photo (

0 142).

1

Display white balance options.

Press the

P button, then highlight the current white balance setting in the information display and press J.

P button

Information display

P, S, A, and M Modes

137

2

Choose a white balance option.

Highlight an option and press

J.

A

The Shooting Menu

White balance can be selected using the

White balance option in the shooting menu

( 0 236), which also can be used to fine-tune

white balance (

0 140) or measure a value

for preset white balance ( 0 142).

The I Fluorescent option in the White

balance menu can be used to select the light source from the bulb types shown at right.

A

Touch Menu Navigation

Tap an option in the white balance menu once to highlight it and again to select it and either display a menu of bulb types ( I Fluorescent) or return to the shooting menu.

138 P, S, A, and M Modes

A

Color Temperature

The perceived color of a light source varies with the viewer and other conditions. Color temperature is an objective measure of the color of a light source, defined with reference to the temperature to which an object would have to be heated to radiate light in the same wavelengths. While light sources with a color temperature in the neighborhood of 5000–5500 K appear white, light sources with a lower color temperature, such as incandescent light bulbs, appear slightly yellow or red. Light sources with a higher color temperature appear tinged with blue.

“Warmer” (redder) colors “Cooler” (bluer) colors

3000 4000 5000 6000 8000 10000 [ K ] q w e r tyu i o !0 !1

q I (sodium-vapor lamps): 2700 K w J (incandescent)/I (warm-white fluorescent.): 3000 K e I (white fluorescent): 3700 K r I (cool-white fluorescent): 4200 K t I (day white fluorescent): 5000 K y H (direct sunlight): 5200 K u N (flash): 5400 K i G (cloudy): 6000 K o I (daylight fluorescent): 6500 K

!0 I (high temp. mercury-vapor): 7200 K

!1 M (shade): 8000 K

Note: All figures are approximate.

A

Bracketing

For information on automatically varying white balance settings over a

series of shots, see page 148.

P, S, A, and M Modes

139

Fine-Tuning White Balance

White balance can be “fine-tuned” to compensate for variations in the color of the light source or to introduce a deliberate color cast into an image. White balance is fine-tuned using the White

balance option in the shooting menu.

1

Display fine-tuning options.

Highlight a white balance option and press 2 (if Fluorescent is selected, highlight the desired lighting type and press

2; note that fine-tuning is not available with Preset manual).

2

Fine-tune white balance.

Use the multi selector to fine-tune

Coordinates

white balance. White balance can be fine-tuned on the amber (A)–blue (B) axis in steps of 0.5 and the green (G)– magenta (M) axis in steps of 0.25. The horizontal (amber-blue) axis corresponds to color temperature, while the vertical (green-magenta)

Adjustment

axis has the similar effects to the corresponding color compensation (CC) filters. The horizontal axis is ruled in increments equivalent to about 5 mired, the vertical axis in increments of about 0.05 diffuse density units.

3

Save changes and exit.

Press J.

140 P, S, A, and M Modes

A

White Balance Fine-Tuning

The colors on the fine-tuning axes are relative, not absolute. For example, moving the cursor to B (blue) when a “warm” setting such as

J (incandescent) is selected will make photographs slightly “colder” but will not actually make them blue.

A

Touch Fine-Tuning

To fine-tune an option in the white balance menu using the touch screen, tap the option once to highlight it and then tap the 2 Adjust button to view the fine-tuning display. To choose a value, tap the coordinate display or the u, v, x, or y icons. Tap 0 OK to return to the shooting menu once white balance has been adjusted to your satisfaction.

A

“Mired”

Any given change in color temperature produces a greater difference in color at low color temperatures than it would at higher color temperatures. For example, a change of 1000 K produces a much greater change in color at 3000 K than at 6000 K. Mired, calculated by multiplying the inverse of the color temperature by 10

6

, is a measure of color temperature that takes such variation into account, and as such is the unit used in color-temperature compensation filters. E.g.:

4000 K–3000 K (a difference of 1000 K)=83 mired

7000 K–6000 K (a difference of 1000 K)=24 mired

P, S, A, and M Modes

141

Preset Manual

Preset manual is used to record and recall custom white balance settings for shooting under mixed lighting or to compensate for light sources with a strong color cast. Two methods are available for setting preset white balance:

Method

Measure

Use photo

Description

Neutral gray or white object is placed under lighting that will be used in final photo and white balance measured by camera (see below).

White balance is copied from photo on memory card

( 0 146).

❚❚ Measuring a Value for Preset White Balance

1

Light a reference object.

Place a neutral gray or white object under the lighting that will be used in the final photograph.

2

Display white balance options.

Highlight White balance in the shooting menu and press 2 to display white balance options. Highlight

Preset manual and press

2.

3

Select Measure.

Highlight Measure and press 2.

142 P, S, A, and M Modes

4

Select Yes.

The menu shown at right will be displayed; highlight Yes and press J.

The camera will enter preset measurement mode.

When the camera is ready to measure white balance, a flashing

D (L) will appear in the viewfinder and information display.

5

Measure white balance.

Before the indicators stop flashing, frame the reference object so that it fills the viewfinder and press the shutter-release button all the way down. No photograph will be recorded; white balance can be measured accurately even when the camera is not in focus.

P, S, A, and M Modes

143

6

Check the results.

If the camera was able to measure a value for white balance, the message shown at right will be displayed and a will flash in the viewfinder and the camera will return to shooting mode.

To return to shooting mode immediately, press the shutter-release button halfway.

If lighting is too dark or too bright, the camera may be unable to measure white balance. A message will appear in the information display and a flashing b a will appear in the viewfinder. Return to Step 5 and measure white balance again.

144 P, S, A, and M Modes

D

Measuring Preset White Balance

If no operations are performed while the displays are flashing, direct measurement mode will end in the time selected for Custom Setting c2 (Auto off timers;

0 253).

D

Preset White Balance

The camera can store only one value for preset white balance at a time; the existing value will be replaced when a new value is measured.

Note that exposure is automatically increased by 1 EV when measuring white balance; when shooting in mode M, adjust exposure so that the

exposure indicator shows ±0 ( 0 120).

A

Other Methods for Measuring Preset White Balance

To enter preset measurement mode (see above) after selecting preset white balance in the information display (

0 137), press J for a few

seconds. If white balance has been assigned to the Fn button (

0 265),

white balance preset measurement mode can be activated by keeping the Fn button pressed for a few seconds after selecting preset white balance with the Fn button and command dial.

A

Gray Panels

For more precise results, measure white balance using a standard gray panel.

P, S, A, and M Modes

145

❚❚ Copying White Balance from a Photograph

Follow the steps below to copy a value for white balance from a photograph on the memory card.

1

Select Preset manual.

Highlight White balance in the shooting menu and press 2 to display white balance options. Highlight

Preset manual and press

2.

2

Select Use photo.

Highlight Use photo and press 2.

3

Choose Select image.

Highlight Select image and press 2

(to skip the remaining steps and use the image last selected for preset white balance, select This image).

4

Choose a folder.

Highlight the folder containing the source image and press

2.

146 P, S, A, and M Modes

5

Highlight the source image.

To view the highlighted image full frame, press and hold the X button.

6

Copy white balance.

Press

J to set preset white balance to the white balance value for the highlighted photograph.

P, S, A, and M Modes

147

Bracketing

Bracketing automatically varies exposure, white balance, or

Active D-Lighting (ADL) settings slightly with each shot,

“bracketing” the current value. Choose in situations in which it is difficult to set exposure or white balance and there is not time to check results and adjust settings with each shot, or to experiment with different settings for the same subject.

Option Description

Vary exposure over a series of three photographs.

k AE bracketing m WB bracketing

! ADL bracketing

Shot 1: unmodified

Shot 2: exposure reduced

Shot 3: exposure increased

Each time the shutter is released, the camera creates three images, each with a different white balance.

Not available with image qualities of NEF (RAW).

Take one photo with Active D-Lighting off, and another at the current Active D-Lighting setting.

1

Choose a bracketing option.

Highlight e2 (Auto bracketing set) in the Custom Settings menu and press

2.

Highlight the desired bracketing type and press J.

148 P, S, A, and M Modes

2

Display bracketing options.

Press the

P button, then highlight the current bracketing setting and press

J.

P button

3

Select a bracketing increment.

Highlight a bracketing increment and press J. Choose from values between

0.3 and 2 EV (AE bracketing) or 1 to 3

(WB bracketing), or select ADL (ADL bracketing).

Information display

P, S, A, and M Modes

149

4

Frame a photograph, focus, and shoot.

AE bracketing

: The camera will vary exposure with each shot. The first shot will be taken at the value currently selected for exposure compensation. The bracketing increment will be subtracted from the current value in the second shot and added in the third shot, “bracketing” the current value. The modified values are reflected in the values shown for shutter speed and aperture.

WB bracketing

: Each shot is processed to create three copies, one at the current white balance setting, one with increased amber, and one with increased blue.

ADL bracketing

: The first shot after bracketing is activated is taken with Active D-Lighting off, the second at the current

Active D-Lighting setting (

0 133; if Active D-Lighting is off,

the second shot will be taken with Active D-Lighting set to

Auto).

In continuous high-speed and continuous low-speed release modes, shooting will pause after each bracketing cycle. If the camera is turned off before all shots in the bracketing sequence have been taken, bracketing will resume from the next shot in the sequence when the camera is turned on.

150 P, S, A, and M Modes

A

The Bracketing Progress Indicator

During AE bracketing, a bar is removed from the bracketing progress indicator with each shot ( v > w > x).

During ADL bracketing, the setting that will be used for the next shot is underlined in the information display.

A

Disabling Bracketing

To disable bracketing and resume normal shooting, select OFF in Step

3 ( 0 149). Bracketing can also be cancelled by performing a two-

button reset (

0 110). To cancel bracketing before all frames have been

recorded, rotate the mode dial to a setting other than P, S, A, or M.

A

Exposure Bracketing

The camera modifies exposure by varying shutter speed and aperture

(mode P), aperture (mode S), or shutter speed (modes A and M). If auto

ISO sensitivity control is enabled, the camera will automatically vary

ISO sensitivity for optimum exposure when the limits of the camera exposure system are exceeded.

P, S, A, and M Modes

151

Picture Controls

In P, S, A, and M modes, your choice of Picture Control determines how pictures are processed (in other modes, the camera selects a Picture Control automatically).

Selecting a Picture Control

Choose a Picture Control according to the subject or type of scene.

Option

Q Standard

R Neutral

S Vivid

Description

Recommended for most situations, this option uses standard processing for balanced results.

A good choice for photographs that will later be processed or retouched, this option uses minimal processing for natural results.

Choose this option for photographs that emphasize primary colors. Pictures are enhanced for a vivid, photoprint effect.

T Monochrome Take monochrome photographs.

e Portrait

Process portraits for skin with natural texture and a rounded feel.

f Landscape

Produces vibrant landscapes and cityscapes.

q Flat

Choose for photographs that will later be extensively processed or retouched. Details are preserved over a wide tone range, from highlights to shadows.

152 P, S, A, and M Modes

1

Display Picture Control options.

Press the

P button, then highlight the current Picture Control and press J.

P button

2

Select a Picture Control.

Highlight a Picture Control and press

J.

Information display

A

Touch Menu Navigation

Picture Controls can also be selected in the shooting menu ( 0 236).

When choosing an option from the Set Picture Control menu using the touch screen (

0 26), tap the option once to highlight it and again

to select it.

P, S, A, and M Modes

153

Modifying Picture Controls

Existing preset or custom Picture Controls (

0 158) can be

modified to suit the scene or the user’s creative intent. Choose a balanced combination of settings using Quick adjust, or make manual adjustments to individual settings.

1

Select a Picture Control.

Highlight Set Picture Control in the shooting menu and press 2.

Highlight the desired Picture Control and press

2.

2

Adjust settings.

Press

1 or 3 to highlight the desired setting and press

4 or 2 to choose a value in increments of 1, or rotate the command dial to choose a value in increments of 0.25 (

0 155). Repeat

this step until all settings have been adjusted, or select a preset combination of settings by using the multi selector to choose Quick adjust. Default settings can be restored by pressing the O button.

3

Save changes and exit.

Press

J.

Picture Controls that have been modified from default settings are indicated by an asterisk (“*”).

154 P, S, A, and M Modes

❚❚ Picture Control Settings

Option

Quick adjust

Sharpening

Clarity

Contrast

Brightness

Saturation

Description

Mute or heighten the effect of the selected

Picture Control (note that this resets all manual adjustments). Not available with Neutral,

Monochrome, Flat, or custom Picture Controls

( 0 158).

Control the sharpness of outlines. Select A to adjust sharpening automatically according to the type of scene.

Adjust clarity manually or select A to let the camera adjust clarity automatically.

Depending on the scene, shadows may appear around bright objects or halos may appear around dark objects at some settings. Clarity is not applied to movies.

Adjust contrast manually or select A to let the camera adjust contrast automatically.

Raise or lower brightness without loss of detail in highlights or shadows.

Control the vividness of colors. Select A to adjust saturation automatically according to the type of scene.

Hue

Adjust hue.

Filter effects

Simulate the effect of color filters on monochrome photographs (

0 157).

Toning

Choose the tint used in monochrome

photographs ( 0 157).

P, S, A, and M Modes

155

D

“A” (Auto)

Results for auto sharpening, clarity, contrast, and saturation vary with exposure and the position of the subject in the frame.

A

Switching Between Manual and Auto

Press the X button to switch back and forth between manual and auto (A) settings for sharpening, clarity, contrast, and saturation.

A

Custom Picture Controls

Custom Picture Controls are created through modifications to existing

Picture Controls using the Manage Picture Control option in the

shooting menu ( 0 158) and can be saved to a memory card for sharing

among other cameras of the same model and compatible software

(

0 161).

A

Previous Settings

The j indicator under the value display in the Picture Control setting menu indicates the previous value for the setting. Use this as a reference when adjusting settings.

A

Custom Picture Control Options

The options available with custom Picture Controls are the same as those on which the custom Picture Control was based.

A

Using the Touch Screen

To use the touch screen to modify a Picture

Control in the Set Picture Control menu, tap the Picture Control once to highlight it and then tap the

2 Adjust button to view

the menu shown in Step 2 on page 154. Tap

a parameter once to highlight it and again to display options, then use the on-screen controls to choose a value (the multi selector can not be used). Note that the touch screen can only be used for this purpose if Enable is selected for Touch controls.

156 P, S, A, and M Modes

A

Filter Effects (Monochrome Only)

The options in this menu simulate the effect of color filters on monochrome photographs. The following filter effects are available:

Option Description

Y

Yellow Enhances contrast. Can be used to tone down the

O

R

Orange

Red brightness of the sky in landscape photographs.

Orange produces more contrast than yellow, red more contrast than orange.

G

Green Softens skin tones. Can be used for portraits.

Note that the effects achieved with Filter effects are more pronounced than those produced by physical glass filters.

A

Toning (Monochrome Only)

Pressing 3 when Toning is selected displays saturation options. Press

4 or 2 to adjust saturation in increments of 1, or rotate the command dial to choose a value in increments of 0.25. Saturation control is not available when B&W (black-and-white) is selected.

A

Touch-Screen Character Entry

To type, tap the letters in the keyboard area (you can select letters by sliding a finger over the screen: the letters are highlighted as you touch them and are not entered in the text area until you lift your finger). To position the cursor, tap directly in the text area or tap the x or y buttons.

P, S, A, and M Modes

157

Creating Custom Picture Controls

The Picture Controls supplied with the camera can be modified and saved as custom Picture Controls.

1

Select Manage Picture Control.

Highlight Manage Picture Control in the shooting menu and press

2.

2

Select Save/edit.

Highlight Save/edit and press

2.

3

Select a Picture Control.

Highlight an existing Picture Control and press

2, or press J to proceed to

Step 5 to save a copy of the highlighted Picture Control without further modification.

4

Edit the selected Picture Control.

See page 155 for more information.

To abandon any changes and start over from default settings, press the O button. Press

J when settings are complete.

158 P, S, A, and M Modes

5

Select a destination.

Highlight a destination for the custom

Picture Control (C-1 through C-9) and press 2.

6

Name the Picture Control.

By default, new Picture Controls are named by adding a two-digit number

(assigned automatically) to the name of the existing Picture Control; to use

Name area

the default name, proceed to Step 7.

To move the cursor in the name area, rotate the command dial. To enter a new letter at the current cursor

Keyboard area

position, use the multi selector to highlight the desired character in the keyboard area and press

J. To delete the character at the current cursor position, press the

O button.

Custom Picture Control names can be up to nineteen characters long. Any characters after the nineteenth will be deleted.

7

Press

X.

Press X to save changes and exit. The new Picture Control will appear in the

Picture Control list.

P, S, A, and M Modes

159

A

Manage Picture Control > Rename

Custom Picture Controls can be renamed at any time using the

Rename option in the Manage Picture Control menu.

A

Manage Picture Control > Delete

The Delete option in the Manage Picture Control menu can be used to delete selected custom Picture Controls when they are no longer needed.

A

The Original Picture Control Icon

The original preset Picture Control on which the custom Picture Control is based is indicated by an icon in the top right corner of the edit display.

Original

Picture Control icon

160 P, S, A, and M Modes

Sharing Custom Picture Controls

Custom Picture Controls created using Picture Control Utility 2, a

utility launched from ViewNX 2 or Capture NX-D ( 0 210), can be

copied to a memory card and loaded into the camera, or custom

Picture Controls created with the camera can be copied to the memory card to be used in compatible cameras and software and then deleted when no longer needed.

To copy custom Picture Controls to or from the memory card, or to delete custom Picture Controls from the memory card, highlight Load/Save in the Manage Picture Control menu and press 2. The following options will be displayed:

• Copy to camera: Copy custom Picture

Controls from the memory card to custom Picture Controls C-1 through

C-9 on the camera and name them as desired.

• Delete from card: Delete selected custom

Picture Controls from the memory card.

• Copy to card: Copy a custom Picture Control (C-1 through C-9) from the camera to a selected destination (1 through 99) on the memory card.

A

Saving Custom Picture Controls

Up to 99 custom Picture Controls can be stored on the memory card at any one time. The memory card can only be used to store user-created custom Picture Controls. The preset Picture Controls supplied with the camera can not be copied to the memory card, renamed, or deleted.

P, S, A, and M Modes

161

Live View

Framing Photographs in the Monitor

Follow the steps below to take photographs in live view.

1

Rotate the live view switch.

The view through the lens will be displayed in the monitor.

Live view switch

2

Position the focus point.

Use the multi selector to position the focus point over your subject as

described on page 167.

Focus point

3

Focus.

Press the shutter-release button halfway. The focus point will flash green while the camera focuses. If the camera is able to focus, the focus point will be displayed in green; if the camera is unable to focus, the focus point will flash red (note that pictures can be taken even when the focus point flashes red; check focus in the monitor before shooting). Except in i and j modes, exposure can be locked by pressing the A (L) button.

162 Live View

4

Take the picture.

Press the shutter-release button the rest of the way down. The monitor turns off and the memory card access lamp lights during recording. Do not remove

Memory card access lamp

the battery or memory card until recording is complete. When shooting is complete, the photograph will be displayed in the monitor for a few seconds before the camera returns to live view mode. To exit, rotate the live view switch.

A

Live View Zoom Preview

Press the X button to zoom in on the selected focus point to a maximum magnification of about 8.3×. A navigation window will appear in a gray frame at the bottom right corner of the display. Use the multi selector to reposition the focus point or press

W (Q) to zoom out. To cancel zoom, press J.

X button

Navigation window

Live View

163

Focusing in Live View

Follow the steps below to choose focus and AF-area modes and position the focus point.

❚❚ Choosing How the Camera Focuses (Focus Mode)

The following focus modes are available in live view (note that full-time–servo AF is not available in

U, ', and ( modes):

Option

AF-S Single-servo AF

AF-F

Full-time-servo

AF

MF Manual focus

Description

For stationary subjects. Focus locks when shutter-release button is pressed halfway.

For moving subjects. Camera focuses continuously until shutter-release button is pressed. Focus locks when shutter-release button is pressed halfway.

Focus manually (

0 165).

1

Display focus options.

Press the

P button, then highlight the current focus mode in the information display and press J.

P button

Information display

164 Live View

2

Choose a focus option.

Highlight an option and press

J.

A

Manual Focus

To focus in manual focus mode ( 0 88),

rotate the lens focus ring until the subject is in focus.

To magnify the view in the monitor for precise focus, press the

X button (0 163).

X button

Live View

165

❚❚ Choosing How the Camera Picks the Area (AF-Area Mode)

In modes other than i, j, and (, the following AF-area modes can be selected in live view (note that subject-tracking AF is not available in

%, U, ', and 3 modes):

Option

6 Face-priority AF

7 Wide-area AF

8 Normal-area AF

9 Subject-tracking AF

Description

Use for portraits. The camera automatically detects and focuses on portrait subjects.

Use for hand-held shots of landscapes and other non-portrait subjects. Use the multi selector to select the focus point.

Use for pin-point focus on a selected spot in the frame. A tripod is recommended.

Use if you want focus to track a selected subject.

1

Display AF-area modes.

Press the

P button, then highlight the current AF-area mode in the information display and press J.

P button

Information display

166 Live View

2

Choose an AF-area mode.

Highlight an option and press

J.

3

Choose the focus point.

6 (face-priority AF): A double yellow border will be displayed when the camera detects a portrait subject (if multiple faces are detected, the camera will focus on the closest subject; to choose a different subject,

Focus point

use the multi selector). If the camera can no longer detect the subject (because, for example, the subject has turned to face away from the camera), the border will no longer be displayed.

7/8 (wide- and normal-area AF): Use the multi selector to move the focus point anywhere in the frame, or press J to position the focus point in the center of the frame.

Focus point

9 (subject-tracking AF): Position the focus point over your subject and press J. The focus point will track the selected subject as it moves through the frame. To end focus tracking, press J a second time.

Focus point

Live View

167

The Live View Display

q w e r t y q Shooting mode w

Item

Manual movie settings indicator

e Time remaining r Wind noise reduction t Microphone sensitivity y Sound level

Description

The mode currently selected with the mode dial.

Displayed when On is selected for

Manual movie settings in mode

M

.

The amount of time remaining before live view ends automatically. Displayed if shooting will end in 30 s or less.

Displayed when On is selected for

Movie settings > Wind noise

reduction in the shooting menu.

Microphone sensitivity for movie recording.

Sound level for audio recording.

Displayed in red if level is too high; adjust microphone sensitivity accordingly.

0

38, 54,

61, 113

179

172, 180

178

178

178

168 Live View

u i o

!0

!1

!2

!3

Item

u Movie frame size i Focus mode o AF-area mode

!0 “No movie” icon

!1

Time remaining (movie mode)

!2 Focus point

!3 Exposure indicator

Description

The frame size of movies recorded in movie mode.

The current focus mode.

The current AF-area mode.

Indicates that movies can not be recorded.

The recording time remaining in movie mode.

The current focus point. The display varies with the option selected for AF-area mode

(

0 166).

Indicates whether the photograph would be under- or over-exposed at current settings (mode M only).

0

177

164

166

175

167

120

Note

: Display shown with all indicators lit for illustrative purposes.

Live View

169

A

Live View/Movie Recording Display Options

Press the R button to cycle through display options as shown below. Circled areas indicate edges of movie frame crop.

R button

Show detailed photo indicators

Show movie indicators

(

0 174)

*

Show basic photo indicators

*

Hide indicators

*

Framing grid

*

* A crop showing the area recorded is displayed during movie recording when frame sizes other than 640 × 424 are selected for

Movie settings > Frame size/frame rate in the shooting menu

( 0 177; the area outside the movie frame crop is grayed out when

movie indicators are displayed).

170 Live View

A

Camera Settings

Except when movie indicators are displayed, you can access the following live view photography settings by pressing the P

button: image quality (

0 90), image size

(

0 92), bracketing increment (0 149), HDR

(

0 135), Active D-Lighting (0 133), white

balance (

0 137), ISO sensitivity (0 99),

Picture Controls (

0 152), focus mode

(

0 164), AF-area mode (0 166), metering

(

0 125), flash mode (0 94, 96), flash

compensation ( 0 131), and exposure

compensation (

0 129). When movie

indicators are displayed, movie settings can

be adjusted (

0 178).

P button

Information display

A

Exposure

Depending on the scene, exposure may differ from that which would be obtained when live view is not used. Metering in live view is adjusted to suit the live view display, producing photographs with exposure close to what is seen in the monitor (note that exposure compensation can only be previewed in the monitor at values between +3 EV and –3 EV). To prevent light entering via the viewfinder from appearing in the photograph or interfering with exposure, we recommend that you cover the viewfinder with your hand or other

objects such as an optional eyepiece cap ( 0 331) before taking

pictures without your eye to the viewfinder (

0 76).

A

HDMI

When the camera is attached to an HDMI video device, the video device will display the view through the lens. If the device supports

HDMI-CEC, select Off for the HDMI > Device control option in the

setup menu ( 0 223) before shooting in live view.

Live View

171

D

Shooting in Live View Mode

Although it will not appear in the final picture, distortion may be visible in the monitor if the camera is panned horizontally or an object moves at high speed through frame. Bright light sources may leave after-images in the monitor when the camera is panned. Bright spots may also appear. Flicker and banding visible in the monitor under fluorescent, mercury vapor, or sodium lamps can be reduced using

Flicker reduction (

0 281), although they may still be visible in the

final photograph at some shutter speeds. When shooting in live view mode, avoid pointing the camera at the sun or other strong light sources. Failure to observe this precaution could result in damage to the camera’s internal circuitry.

Live view ends automatically when the monitor is closed (closing the monitor does not end live view on televisions or other external displays).

D

The Count Down Display

A count down will be displayed 30 s before live view ends automatically (

0 168; the timer turns red 5 s before the auto off timer

expires (

0 253) or if live view is about to end to protect the internal

circuits). Depending on shooting conditions, the timer may appear immediately when live view is selected.

172 Live View

D

Using Autofocus in Live View

Autofocus is slower in live view and the monitor may brighten or darken while the camera focuses. The camera may be unable to focus in the situations listed below (note that the focus point may sometimes be displayed in green when the camera is unable to focus):

The subject contains lines parallel to the long edge of the frame

The subject lacks contrast

The subject in the focus point contains areas of sharply contrasting brightness, or the subject is lit by spot lighting or by a neon sign or other light source that changes in brightness

Flicker or banding appears under fluorescent, mercury-vapor, sodium-vapor, or similar lighting

A cross (star) filter or other special filter is used

The subject appears smaller than the focus point

The subject is dominated by regular geometric patterns (e.g., blinds or a row of windows in a skyscraper)

The subject is moving

In addition, the subject-tracking AF may be unable to track subjects if they move quickly, leave the frame or are obscured by other objects, change visibly in size, color, or brightness, or are too small, too large, too bright, too dark, or similar in color or brightness to the background.

Live View

173

Recording and Viewing Movies

Recording Movies

Movies can be recorded in live view mode.

1

Rotate the live view switch.

The view through the lens will be displayed in the monitor.

D

The

0 Icon

A

0 icon (0 169) indicates that

movies can not be recorded.

A

Before Recording

Set aperture before recording in mode

A

or M (

0 118, 119).

Live view switch

2

Focus.

Frame the opening shot and focus as described in Steps 2 and 3 of “Framing

Photographs in the Monitor” ( 0 162;

see also “Focusing in Live View” on pages

0 164–167). Note

that the number of subjects that can be detected in facepriority AF drops during movie recording.

174 Recording and Viewing Movies

3

Start recording.

Press the movie-record button to start recording. A recording indicator and the time available are displayed in the monitor. Except in i and j modes, exposure can be locked by pressing the

A (L) button (0 127) or (in

modes h, P, S, A, and %) altered by up to ±3 EV in steps of

1

/

3

EV by pressing the E (N) button and rotating the command dial (

0 129;

note that depending on the brightness of the subject, changes to exposure may have no visible effect).

Movie-record button

Time remaining

Recording indicator

4

End recording.

Press the movie-record button again to end recording.

Recording will end automatically when the maximum length is reached, the memory card is full, another mode is selected, or the monitor is closed (closing the monitor does not end recording on televisions or other external displays).

A

Taking Photographs During Movie Recording

To end movie recording, take a photograph, and exit to live view, press the shutter-release button all the way down and hold it in this position

until the shutter is released. The touch shutter (

0 21) can not be used

to take photos during movie recording.

A

Maximum Length

The maximum length for individual movie files is 4 GB (for maximum

recording times, see page 177); note that depending on memory card

write speed, shooting may end before this length is reached ( 0 334).

Recording and Viewing Movies

175

D

Recording Movies

Flicker, banding, or distortion may be visible in the monitor and in the final movie under fluorescent, mercury vapor, or sodium lamps or if the camera is panned horizontally or an object moves at high speed through frame (flicker and banding can be reduced using Flicker

reduction; 0 281). Bright light sources may leave after-images when

the camera is panned. Jagged edges, color fringing, moiré, and bright spots may also appear. Bright regions or bands may appear in some areas of the frame if the subject is briefly illuminated by a flash or other bright, momentary light source. When recording movies, avoid pointing the camera at the sun or other strong light sources. Failure to observe this precaution could result in damage to the camera’s internal circuitry.

The camera can record both video and sound; do not cover the

microphone (

0 2) during recording. Note that the built-in

microphone may record sounds made by the camera or lens during autofocus and vibration reduction.

Flash lighting can not be used during movie recording.

Matrix metering is used regardless of the metering method selected.

Shutter speed and ISO sensitivity are adjusted automatically unless On is selected for Manual movie settings (

0 179) and the camera is in

mode M.

176 Recording and Viewing Movies

Movie Settings

Use the Movie settings option in the shooting menu ( 0 236) to

adjust the following settings.

• Frame size/frame rate, Movie quality: Choose from the following options. The frame rate depends on the option currently selected for Video mode in the setup menu

(

0 281):

Frame size/frame rate

Frame size (pixels) Frame rate

1

Maximum length

(high movie quality

/

normal movie quality)

4

L/t

M/u

N/r

O/s

P/k

Q/l

R/o

S/n

T/p

1920 × 1080

1280 × 720

640 × 424

60p

2

50p

3

30p

2

25p

3

24p

60p

2

50p

3

30p

2

25p

3

10 min./

20 min.

20 min./

29 min. 59 s

29 min. 59 s/

29 min. 59 s

1 Listed value. Actual frame rates for 60p, 50p, 30p, 25p, and 24p are 59.94, 50, 29.97, 25, and 23.976 fps respectively.

2 Available when

NTSC is selected for Video mode (

0 281).

3 Available when

PAL is selected for Video mode.

4 Movies recorded in miniature effect mode are up to three minutes long when played back.

Recording and Viewing Movies

177

• Microphone: Turn the built-in or optional stereo

microphones (

0 180, 333) on or off or adjust microphone

sensitivity. Choose Auto sensitivity to adjust sensitivity automatically, Microphone off to turn sound recording off; to select microphone sensitivity manually, select Manual

sensitivity and choose a sensitivity.

• Wind noise reduction: Select On to enable the low-cut filter for the built-in microphone (optional stereo microphones are

unaffected; 0 180, 333), reducing noise produced by wind

blowing over the microphone (note that other sounds may also be affected). Wind-noise reduction for optional stereo microphones can be enabled or disabled using microphone controls.

A

The Live View Display

The movie crop can be viewed during live view by pressing the R button to select the

“show movie indicators”, “hide indicators”,

“framing grid”, or “show basic photo

indicators” display (

0 170). When movie

indicators are displayed, you can access the following movie settings by pressing the P button: movie frame size/quality, microphone sensitivity, white balance

P button

(

0 137), Picture Controls (0 152), focus

mode (

0 164), AF-area mode (0 166), wind

noise reduction, and exposure compensation (

0 129). If On is selected for

Movie settings > Manual movie settings

Information display

(

0 177) in mode M, ISO sensitivity (0 99)

can be adjusted in place of exposure compensation.

178 Recording and Viewing Movies

• Manual movie settings: Choose On to allow manual adjustments to shutter speed and ISO sensitivity when the camera is in mode M. Shutter speed can be set to values as fast as

1

/

4000

s; the slowest speed available varies with the frame rate:

1

/

30

s for frame rates of 24p, 25p, and 30p,

1

/

50

s for

50p, and

1

/

60

s for 60p. If shutter speed is not in this range when live view starts, it will automatically be set to a supported value, and remain at this value when live view ends. Note that ISO sensitivity is fixed at the value selected; the camera does not adjust ISO sensitivity automatically when On is selected for ISO sensitivity settings > Auto ISO

sensitivity control in the shooting menu (

0 241).

1

Select Movie settings.

Highlight Movie settings in the shooting menu and press 2.

2

Choose movie options.

Highlight the desired item and press

2, then highlight an option and press

J.

Recording and Viewing Movies

179

A

Using an External Microphone

The optional ME-1 stereo microphone can be used to reduce noise caused by lens vibration being recorded during autofocus.

D

The Count-Down Display

A count down will be displayed 30 s before movie recording ends automatically (

0 168). Depending on shooting conditions, the timer

may appear immediately when movie recording begins. Note that regardless of the amount of recording time available, live view will still end automatically when the timer expires. Wait for the internal circuits to cool before resuming movie recording.

A

HDMI

When the camera is attached to an HDMI video device, the video device will display the view through the lens. If the device supports

HDMI-CEC, select Off for the HDMI > Device control option in the

setup menu ( 0 223) before shooting in live view.

180 Recording and Viewing Movies

Viewing Movies

Movies are indicated by a

1 icon in full-frame playback (0 188).

Press

J to start playback; your current position is indicated by the movie progress bar.

1 icon

Length

Current position/ total length Volume

1

Movie progress bar

The following operations can be performed:

To Use Description

Pause Pause playback.

Play

Advance/ rewind

Skip 10 s

Guide

Resume playback when movie is paused or during rewind/advance.

Speed increases with each press, from 2× to

4× to 8× to 16×; keep pressed to skip to beginning or end of movie (first frame is indicated by h in top right corner of monitor, last frame by i). If playback is paused, movie rewinds or advances one frame at a time; hold for continuous rewind or advance.

Rotate the command dial one stop to skip ahead or back 10 s.

Recording and Viewing Movies

181

To

Adjust volume

Return to full-frame playback

K /

Use

X/W (Q)

Description

Press X to increase volume, W (Q) to decrease.

Press K or 1 to exit to full-frame playback.

182 Recording and Viewing Movies

Editing Movies

Trim footage to create edited copies of movies or save selected frames as JPEG stills.

Option

f Choose start/end point g Save selected frame

Description

Create a copy from which the opening or closing footage has been removed.

Save a selected frame as a JPEG still.

Trimming Movies

To create trimmed copies of movies:

1

Display a movie full frame.

2

Pause the movie on the new opening or closing frame.

Play the movie back as described on

page 181, pressing

J to start and resume playback and 3 to pause.

Pause playback when you reach the new opening or closing frame.

3

Select Choose start/end point.

Press the

P button, then highlight

Choose start/end point and press 2.

Movie progress bar

P button

Recording and Viewing Movies

183

4

Choose the current frame as the new start or end point.

To create a copy that begins from the current frame, highlight Start point and press J. The frames before the current frame will be removed when you save the copy.

Start point

To create a copy that ends at the current frame, highlight End

point and press J. The frames after the current frame will be removed when you save the copy.

End point

5

Confirm the new start or end point.

If the desired frame is not currently displayed, press

4 or 2 to advance or rewind (to skip to 10 s ahead or back, rotate the command dial one stop).

6

Create the copy.

Once the desired frame is displayed, press 1.

184 Recording and Viewing Movies

7

Preview the movie.

To preview the copy, highlight

Preview and press J (to interrupt the preview and return to the save options menu, press 1). To abandon the current copy and return to Step 5, highlight Cancel and press

J; to save the copy, proceed to

Step 8.

8

Save the copy.

Highlight Save as new file and press

J to save the copy to a new file. To replace the original movie file with the edited copy, highlight Overwrite

existing file and press J.

D

Trimming Movies

Movies must be at least two seconds long. The copy will not be saved if there is insufficient space available on the memory card.

Copies have the same time and date of creation as the original.

A

Choosing the Role of the Current Frame

To make the frame displayed in Step 5 the new end point ( x) instead of the new start point ( w) or vice versa, press the A (L) button.

A (L) button

Recording and Viewing Movies

185

Saving Selected Frames

To save a copy of a selected frame as a JPEG still:

1

Pause the movie on the desired frame.

Play the movie back as described on

page 181, pressing

J to start and resume playback and 3 to pause.

Pause the movie at the frame you intend to copy.

2

Choose Save selected frame.

Press the

P button, then highlight

Save selected frame and press 2.

P button

3

Create a still copy.

Press 1 to create a still copy of the current frame.

186 Recording and Viewing Movies

4

Save the copy.

Highlight Yes and press

J to create a

fine-quality ( 0 90) JPEG copy of the

selected frame.

A

Save Selected Frame

JPEG movie stills created with the Save selected frame option can not be retouched. JPEG movie stills lack some categories of photo

information ( 0 192).

Recording and Viewing Movies

187

Playback and Deletion

Viewing Pictures

Full-Frame Playback

To play photographs back, press the K button. The most recent photograph will be displayed in the monitor.

K button

To

View additional photographs

View additional photo info

Return to shooting mode

K /

Use

Play movie

Description

Press 2 to view photographs in order recorded, 4 to view photographs in reverse order.

Press

1 or 3 to view information

about current photograph ( 0 192).

Press the K button or press the shutter-release button halfway to exit to shooting mode.

If current picture is marked with 1 icon to show that it is a movie, pressing

J starts movie playback

( 0 181).

188 Playback and Deletion

A

The

P Button

Pressing the P button in full-frame, thumbnail, or calendar playback displays playback options. Highlight options and press

2 to rate pictures (0 203), retouch

photos or edit movies (

0 183, 286), or select

pictures for transfer to a smart device

(

0 231).

P button

Playback and Deletion

189

Thumbnail Playback

To display images in “contact sheets” of 4, 12, or 80 images, press the W (Q) button.

W (Q) W (Q)

Full-frame playback

To

Highlight images

X X

Thumbnail playback

Use

Calendar playback

Description

Use multi selector or command dial to highlight pictures.

View highlighted image

Return to shooting mode

K /

Press

J to display the highlighted image full frame.

Press the

K button or press the shutter-release button halfway to exit to shooting mode.

190 Playback and Deletion

Calendar Playback

To view images taken on a selected date, press the W (Q) button when 80 images are displayed.

Date list

W (Q) W (Q)

X X

Thumbnail list

Full-frame playback

Thumbnail playback

Calendar playback

The operations that can be performed depend on whether the cursor is in the date list or the thumbnail list:

To

Toggle between date list and thumbnail list

Exit to thumbnail playback/Zoom in on highlighted photo

Use

W (Q)

X

Description

Press W (Q) or J button in date list to place cursor in thumbnail list.

Press W (Q) again to return to date list.

• Date list: Exit to 80-frame playback.

• Thumbnail list: Press and hold

X button to zoom in on highlighted picture.

Highlight dates/

Highlight images

• Date list: Highlight date.

• Thumbnail list: Highlight picture.

Toggle full frame playback

Return to shooting mode

K /

• Thumbnail list: View highlighted picture.

Press the K button or press the shutter-release button halfway to exit to shooting mode.

Playback and Deletion

191

Photo Information

Photo information is superimposed on images displayed in fullframe playback. Press

1 or 3 to cycle through photo information as shown below. Note that “image only”, shooting data, RGB histograms, highlights, and overview data are only displayed if corresponding option is selected for Playback

display options ( 0 234). Location data are only displayed if an

optional GP-1/GP-1A was used when the photo was taken

(

0 283).

File information None (image only) Overview

Highlights Location data

RGB histogram

192 Playback and Deletion

Shooting data

❚❚ File Information

1 2 3 4

11

10

9 8

1

Protect status.......................... 202

2

Retouch indicator ................. 289

3

Upload marking..................... 231

4

Frame number/total number of images

5

File name.................................. 240

6

Image quality ............................90

5

6

7

7

Image size .................................. 92

8

Time of recording...........32, 275

9

Date of recording ...........32, 275

10

Folder name ............................ 238

11

Rating ........................................ 203

❚❚ Highlights

*

1

2

1

Folder number—frame

number.................................. 238

2

Image highlights

* Flashing areas indicate highlights (areas that may be overexposed).

Playback and Deletion

193

❚❚ RGB Histogram

3

4

1

2

5

1

Histogram (RGB channel). In all histograms, horizontal axis gives pixel brightness, vertical axis number of pixels.

2

Histogram (red channel)

3

Histogram (green channel)

4

Histogram (blue channel)

5

White balance ........................ 137

White balance

fine-tuning....................... 140

Preset manual ..................... 142

A

Playback Zoom

To zoom in on the photograph when the histogram is displayed, press

X. Use the X and W (Q) buttons to zoom in and out and scroll the image with the multi selector. The histogram will be updated to show only the data for the portion of the image visible in the monitor.

194 Playback and Deletion

A

Histograms

Camera histograms are intended as a guide only and may differ from those displayed in imaging applications. Some sample histograms are shown below:

If the image contains objects with a wide range of brightnesses, the distribution of tones will be relatively even.

If the image is dark, tone distribution will be shifted to the left.

If the image is bright, tone distribution will be shifted to the right.

Increasing exposure compensation shifts the distribution of tones to the right, while decreasing exposure compensation shifts the distribution to the left. Histograms can provide a rough idea of overall exposure when bright ambient lighting makes it difficult to see photographs in the monitor.

Playback and Deletion

195

❚❚ Shooting Data

5

6

7

8

9

1

2

3

4

10

1

Metering .................................. 125

Shutter speed......................... 114

Aperture................................... 114

2

Shooting

mode................. 38, 54, 61, 113

ISO sensitivity

1

.........................99

3

Exposure compensation .... 129

4

Focal length ............................ 322

5

Lens data

6

Focus mode...................... 78, 164

Lens VR (vibration reduction)

2

................... 37, 245

7

Flash type........................259, 323

Commander mode

2

............. 259

8

Flash mode..........................94, 96

9

Flash control ........................... 259

Flash compensation............. 131

10

Camera name

1 Displayed in red if photo was taken with auto ISO sensitivity control on.

2 Displayed only in photos taken with accessories that support this function.

11

12

13

11

White balance ........................ 137

White balance

fine-tuning ...................... 140

Preset manual..................... 142

12

Color space.............................. 243

13

Picture Control

*

..................... 152

* Items displayed vary with Picture Control selected.

196 Playback and Deletion

14

15

16

17

18

19

14

High ISO noise reduction ... 244

Long exposure noise

reduction .............................. 243

15

Active D-Lighting.................. 133

16

HDR (high dynamic

range)..................................... 135

17

Vignette control..................... 244

18

Retouch history...................... 286

19

Image comment ....................273

20

21

20

Name of photographer

*

..... 274

21

Copyright holder

*

................. 274

* The fourth page of the shooting data is only displayed if copyright information was recorded

with the photograph as described on page 274.

Playback and Deletion

197

❚❚ Overview Data

1 2 3 4

15

5

8

6

7

28

27

16 17 18 19 20

9

26

21

25 24 23

22

14 13 12 11 10

1

Frame number/total number of images

2

Upload marking .................... 231

3

Protect status ......................... 202

4

Camera name

5

Retouch indicator ................. 289

6

Image comment

indicator ............................... 273

7

Location data indicator ...... 283

8

Histogram showing the distribution of tones in the image (

0 195).

9

Image quality ............................90

10

Image size...................................92

11

File name ................................. 240

12

Time of recording .......... 32, 275

13

Date of recording........... 32, 275

14

Folder name............................ 238

15

Rating........................................ 203

16

Metering................................... 125

17

Shooting

mode................. 38, 54, 61, 113

18

Shutter speed......................... 114

19

Aperture ................................... 114

20

ISO sensitivity

1

..........................99

21

Focal length ............................ 322

22

Active D-Lighting.................. 133

23

Picture Control....................... 152

24

Color space.............................. 243

25

Flash mode..........................94, 96

26

White balance ........................ 137

White balance

fine-tuning........................... 140

Preset manual ........................ 142

27

Flash compensation............. 131

Commander mode

2

............. 259

28

Exposure compensation..... 129

1 Displayed in red if photo was taken with ISO sensitivity auto control on.

2 Displayed only in photos taken with accessories that support this function.

198 Playback and Deletion

❚❚ Location Data

Location data are displayed only if an optional GP-1 or GP-1A

GPS unit (

0 333) was used when the photo was taken (0 283).

In the case of movies, the data give the location at the start of recording.

1

2

3

4

1

Latitude

2

Longitude

3

Altitude

4

Coordinated Universal Time

(UTC)

Playback and Deletion

199

Taking a Closer Look: Playback Zoom

Press the X button to zoom in on the image displayed in fullframe playback. The following operations can be performed while zoom is in effect:

To

Zoom in or out

View other areas of image

Use

X /

W (Q)

Description

Press X to zoom in to maximum of approximately 33× (large images),

25× (medium images) or 13× (small images). Press W (Q) to zoom out.

While photo is zoomed in, use multi selector to view areas of image not visible in monitor. Keep multi selector pressed to scroll rapidly to other areas of frame. Navigation window is displayed when zoom ratio is altered; area currently visible in monitor is indicated by yellow border. Bar under navigation window shows zoom ratio; turns green at ratio of 1 : 1.

200 Playback and Deletion

To

Select/zoom in on or out from faces

Use

P

Description

Faces detected during zoom are indicated by white borders in navigation window. Press P and use the multi selector to view other faces, or press J to zoom in on the currently selected face. Press P again to return to normal zoom.

View other images

Cancel zoom

Return to shooting mode

K /

Rotate command dial to view same location in other images at current zoom ratio. Playback zoom is cancelled when a movie is displayed.

Cancel zoom and return to full-frame playback.

Press the

K button or press the shutter-release button halfway to exit to shooting mode.

Playback and Deletion

201

Protecting Photographs from Deletion

In full-frame, zoom, thumbnail, and calendar playback, press the

A (L) button to protect the current picture from accidental deletion. Protected files are marked with a

P icon and can not be deleted using the

O button or the Delete option in the playback menu. Note that protected images will be deleted

when the memory card is formatted ( 0 272). To remove

protection from a picture so that it can be deleted, display or highlight it and press the

A (L) button.

A (L) button

A

Removing Protection from All Images

To remove protection from all images in the folder or folders currently

selected in the Playback folder menu ( 0 234), press the A (L) and

O buttons together for about two seconds during playback.

202 Playback and Deletion

Rating Pictures

Rate pictures or mark them as candidates for later deletion.

Rating is not available with protected images.

Rating Individual Pictures

1

Select an image.

Display the image in full-frame playback or playback zoom or highlight it in the thumbnail list in thumbnail or calendar playback.

2

Display playback options.

Press the P button to display playback options.

P button

3

Select Rating.

Highlight Rating and press 2.

4

Choose a rating.

Press 1 or 3 to choose a rating of from zero to five stars, or select ) to mark the picture as a candidate for later deletion. Press

J to complete the operation.

Playback and Deletion

203

Rating Multiple Pictures

Use the Rating option in the playback menu to rate multiple pictures.

1

Select Rating.

Highlight Rating in the playback menu and press

2.

2

Rate pictures.

Press

4 or 2 to highlight pictures (to view the currently highlighted picture full frame, press and hold the X button) and press

1 or 3 to choose a rating of from zero to five stars, or select

) to mark the picture as a candidate for later deletion.

Press J to complete the operation.

204 Playback and Deletion

Deleting Photographs

To delete the photograph displayed in full-frame playback or highlighted in the thumbnail list, press the

O button. To delete multiple selected photographs, all photographs taken on a selected date, or all photographs in the current playback folder, use the Delete option in the playback menu. Once deleted, photographs can not be recovered. Note that pictures that are protected can not be deleted.

Full-Frame, Thumbnail, and Calendar Playback

Press the O button to delete the current photograph.

1

Press the

O button.

A confirmation dialog will be displayed.

O button

2

Press the

O button again.

To delete the photograph, press the

O button again. To exit without deleting the photograph, press the K button.

A

Calendar Playback

During calendar playback, you can delete all photographs taken on a selected date by highlighting the date in the date list and pressing the

O button (0 191).

Playback and Deletion

205

The Playback Menu

The Delete option in the playback menu contains the following options. Note that depending on the number of images, some time may be required for deletion.

Option

Q Selected n Select date

R All

Description

Delete selected pictures.

Delete all pictures taken on a selected date

(

0 207).

Delete all pictures in the folder currently selected

for playback (

0 234).

❚❚ Selected: Deleting Selected Photographs

1

Select pictures.

Use the multi selector to highlight a picture and press the W (Q) button to select or deselect (to view the highlighted picture full screen, press and hold the

X button). Selected pictures are marked by a

O icon.

Repeat as desired to select additional pictures.

W (Q) button

2

Press

J to complete the operation.

A confirmation dialog will be displayed; highlight Yes and press

J.

206 Playback and Deletion

❚❚ Select Date: Deleting Photographs Taken on a Selected Date

1

Select dates.

Highlight a date and press

2 to select all pictures taken on the highlighted date. Selected dates are indicated by check marks. Repeat as desired to select additional dates; to deselect a date, highlight it and press

2.

2

Press

J to complete the operation.

A confirmation dialog will be displayed; highlight Yes and press J.

Playback and Deletion

207

Slide Shows

The Slide show option in the playback menu is used to display a slide show of the pictures in the current playback folder (

0 234).

1

Select Slide show.

Highlight Slide show in the playback menu and press 2.

2

Start the slide show.

Highlight Start in the slide show menu and press J.

The following operations can be performed while the slide show is in progress:

Use To

Skip back/ skip ahead

View additional photo info

Description

Press 4 to return to previous frame, 2 to skip to next frame.

Change photo info displayed (

0 192).

Pause

Raise/lower volume

Exit to playback mode

X /

W (Q)

K

Pause slide show. Select Restart to resume.

Press

X during movie playback to increase volume, W (Q) to decrease.

End show and return to playback mode.

208 Playback and Deletion

The dialog shown at right is displayed when the show ends. Select Restart to restart or Exit to return to the playback menu.

Slide Show Options

Before starting a slide show, you can use the options in the slide show menu to select the images displayed by type or rating and choose how long each image is displayed.

• Image type: Choose from Still images

and movies, Still images only,

Movies only, and By rating. To include only pictures with selected ratings, highlight By rating and press

2. A list of ratings will be displayed; highlight ratings and press

2 to select or deselect pictures with the highlighted rating for inclusion in the slide show. Selected ratings are indicated by a check mark. Press

J to exit when the desired ratings are selected.

• Frame interval: Choose how long still images are displayed.

Playback and Deletion

209

Connections

Installing ViewNX 2

To upload, view, edit, and share photos and movies, download the ViewNX 2 installer from the following website and follow the on-screen instructions to complete installation. An Internet connection is required. For system requirements and other information, see the Nikon website for your region (

0 xix).

http://downloadcenter.nikonimglib.com/

Nikon also offers Capture NX-D image fine-tuning software, available for download from:

http://downloadcenter.nikonimglib.com/

A

Capture NX-D

Use Nikon’s Capture NX-D software to fine-tune photos or to change settings for NEF (RAW) pictures and save them in other formats.

Capture NX-D also offers an Image Dust Off feature that processes NEF

(RAW) images to remove image artifacts caused by dust inside the camera.

D

Use the Latest Versions

Be sure to use the latest version. Using a version that does not support your camera may result in difficulties copying NEF (RAW) images to your computer.

210 Connections

Using ViewNX 2

Copy Pictures to the Computer

Before proceeding, be sure you have installed ViewNX 2 (

0 210).

1

Connect the USB cable.

After turning the camera off and ensuring that a memory card is inserted, connect the supplied USB cable as shown and then turn the camera on.

A

Use a Reliable Power Source

To ensure that data transfer is not interrupted, be sure the camera battery is fully charged.

A

Connecting Cables

Be sure the camera is off when connecting or disconnecting interface cables. Do not use force or attempt to insert the connectors at an angle.

D

During Transfer

Do not turn the camera off or disconnect the USB cable while transfer is in progress.

D

USB Hubs

Transfer may not proceed as expected if the camera is connected via a USB hub or keyboard.

Connections

211

2

Start Nikon Transfer 2 component of ViewNX 2.

If a message is displayed prompting you to choose a program, select Nikon Transfer 2.

A

Windows 7

If the following dialog is displayed, select Nikon Transfer 2 as described below.

1 Under Import pictures and videos, click Change program. A program selection dialog will be displayed; select Import File using Nikon

Transfer 2 and click OK.

2 Double-click Import File.

A

Windows 8.1

Windows 8.1 may display an AutoPlay prompt when the camera is connected.

Tap or click the dialog and then tap or click Import File/Nikon Transfer 2 to select Nikon Transfer 2.

212 Connections

3

Click Start Transfer.

At default settings, pictures on the memory card will be copied to the computer.

Start Transfer

4

Terminate the connection.

When transfer is complete, turn the camera off and disconnect the USB cable.

A

For More Information

Consult online help for more information on using ViewNX 2.

Connections

213

Printing Photographs

Selected JPEG images can be printed on a PictBridge printer

(

0 374) connected directly to the camera.

Connecting the Printer

Connect the camera using the supplied USB cable. Do not use force or attempt to insert the connectors at an angle.

When the camera and printer are turned on, a welcome screen will be displayed in the monitor, followed by a PictBridge playback display.

D

Selecting Photographs for Printing

NEF (RAW) photographs ( 0 90) can not be selected for printing. JPEG

copies of NEF (RAW) images can be created using the NEF (RAW)

processing option in the retouch menu ( 0 289).

D

Date Imprint

If you select On for Print date in the PictBridge menu when printing photographs containing date information recorded using Custom

Setting d4 (Date stamp;

0 256), the date will appear twice. The

imprinted date may however be cropped out if the photographs are cropped or printed without a border.

214 Connections

Printing Pictures One at a Time

1

Display the desired picture.

Press 4 or 2 to view additional pictures. Press the X button to zoom in on the current frame (press

K to exit zoom). To view eight pictures at a time, press the

W (Q) button. Use the multi selector to highlight pictures, or press

X to display the highlighted picture full frame.

2

Adjust printing options.

Press

J to display the following items, then press 1 or 3 to highlight an item and press

2 to view options (only options supported by the current printer are listed; to use the default option, select Printer default). After selecting an option, press J to return to the printer settings menu.

Option

Page size

Choose a page size.

No. of copies

Description

This option is listed only when pictures are printed one at a time. Press 1 or 3 to choose number of copies (maximum 99).

Border

Print date

Cropping

Choose whether to frame photos in white borders.

Choose whether to print the times and dates of recordings on photos.

This option is listed only when pictures are printed one at a time. To exit without cropping, highlight No

cropping and press J. To crop the current picture, highlight Crop and press 2. A crop selection dialog will be displayed; press

X to increase the size of the crop, W (Q) to decrease, and use the multi selector to position the crop. Note that print quality may drop if small crops are printed at large sizes.

Connections

215

3

Start printing.

Select Start printing and press

J to start printing. To cancel before all copies have been printed, press J.

Printing Multiple Pictures

1

Display the PictBridge menu.

Press the

G button in the PictBridge playback display.

2

Choose an option.

Highlight one of the following options and press 2.

• Print select: Select pictures for printing. Press

4 or 2 to scroll through pictures (to view the highlighted picture full screen, press and hold the X button) and press 1 or 3 to choose the number of prints. To deselect a picture, set the number of prints to zero.

• Select date: Print one copy of all the pictures taken on a selected date. Press

1 or 3 to highlight a date and press 2 to select or deselect. To view the pictures taken on the selected date, press W (Q). Use the multi selector to scroll through the pictures, or press and hold X to view the current picture full screen. Press

W (Q) again to return to the date selection dialog.

• Print (DPOF): Print the current DPOF print order (

0 218). The

order can be viewed and modified before printing as described in the description for Print select, above.

• Index print: To create an index print of all JPEG pictures on the memory card, proceed to Step 3. Note that if the memory card contains more than 256 pictures, only the first 256 images will be printed. A warning will be displayed if the page size selected in Step 3 is too small for an index print.

216 Connections

3

Adjust printer settings.

Adjust printer settings as described in Step 2 on page 215.

4

Start printing.

Select Start printing and press J to start printing. To cancel before all copies have been printed, press J.

Connections

217

Creating a DPOF Print Order: Print Set

The DPOF print order option in the playback menu is used to create digital “print orders” for PictBridge-compatible printers and devices that support DPOF (

0 374).

1

Choose DPOF print order >

Select/set.

Select DPOF print order in the playback menu, then highlight

Select/set and press

2 (to remove all photographs from the print order, select Deselect all).

2

Select pictures.

Press 4 or 2 to scroll through the pictures on the memory card (to view the highlighted picture full screen, press and hold the

X button) and press 1 or 3 to choose the number of prints (maximum 99). To deselect a picture, set the number of prints to zero. Press

J when all the desired pictures have been selected.

218 Connections

3

Select imprint options.

Highlight the following options and press 2 to toggle the highlighted option on or off.

• Print shooting data: Print shutter speed and aperture on all pictures in print order.

• Print date: Print date of recording on all pictures in print order.

4

Complete the print order.

Press

J to complete the print order.

D

DPOF Print Order

To print the current print order when the camera is connected to a

PictBridge printer, select Print (DPOF) in the PictBridge menu and follow the steps in “Printing Multiple Pictures” to modify and print the current order (

0 216). DPOF print date and shooting data options are

not supported when printing via direct USB connection; to print the date of recording on photographs in the current print order, use the

PictBridge Print date option.

The DPOF print order option can not be used if there is not enough space on the memory card to store the print order.

NEF (RAW) photographs (

0 90) can not be selected using this option.

JPEG copies of NEF (RAW) images can be created using the NEF (RAW)

processing option in the retouch menu (

0 289).

Print orders may not print correctly if images are deleted using a computer or other device after the print order is created.

Connections

219

Viewing Pictures on TV

The supplied audio video (A/V) cable can be used to connect the camera to a television or video recorder for playback or recording. The optional High-Definition Multimedia Interface

(HDMI) cable (

0 333) or a type C HDMI cable (available

separately from third-party suppliers) can be used to connect the camera to high-definition video devices.

Standard Definition Devices

Before connecting the A/V cable to a standard television as

shown, confirm that the camera video standard ( 0 281)

matches that used in the TV. Always turn the camera off before connecting or disconnecting the A/V cable.

Audio (red)

Audio (white)

Video (yellow)

Connect to camera

Connect to video device

Tune the television to the video channel, then turn the camera on and press the K button. During playback, images will be displayed on the television screen. Note that the edges of images may not be displayed.

220 Connections

A

Video Mode

If no image is displayed, check that camera is correctly connected and

that the option selected for Video mode (

0 281) matches the video

standard used in the TV.

A

Television Playback

Use of an AC adapter (available separately) is recommended for extended playback.

Connections

221

High-Definition Devices

The camera can be connected to HDMI devices using an HDMI cable as shown. Always turn the camera off before connecting or disconnecting an HDMI cable.

Connect to camera

Connect to high-definition device

(choose cable with connector for

HDMI device)

Tune the device to the HDMI channel, then turn the camera on and press the K button. During playback, images will be displayed on the high-definition television or monitor screen.

Note that the edges of images may not be displayed.

A

Playback Volume

Volume can be adjusted using television controls; the camera controls can not be used.

222 Connections

❚❚ Choosing an Output Resolution

To choose the format for images output to the HDMI device, select HDMI >

Output resolution in the camera setup

menu ( 0 270). If Auto is selected, the

camera will automatically select the appropriate format.

❚❚ Controlling the Camera with the TV Remote

If On is selected for HDMI >Device control in the setup menu

(

0 270) when the camera is connected to a television that

supports HDMI-CEC and both the camera and television are on, the television remote can be used in place of the camera multi selector and

J button during full-frame playback and slide shows. If Off is selected, the television remote can not be used to control the camera, but the camera can be used to shoot photographs and movies in live view.

A

HDMI-CEC Devices

HDMI-CEC (High-Definition Multimedia Interface–Consumer

Electronics Control) is a standard that allows HDMI devices to be used to control peripherals to which they are connected. When the camera is connected to an HDMI-CEC device, ) will appear in the viewfinder in place of the number of exposures remaining.

A

1920 × 1080 60p/50p

Selecting 1920 × 1080; 60p or 1920 × 1080; 50p for Movie settings

> Frame size/frame rate may cause variations in the resolution and frame rate of the data output to HDMI devices during recording.

During playback (

0 181), HDMI devices will display the movie only;

indicators will not be displayed.

D

HDMI > Output Resolution

Movies can not be output at resolutions of 1920 × 1080; 60p or 1920

× 1080; 50p. Some devices may not support an Output resolution setting of Auto; in this case, select 1080i (interlaced).

Connections

223

Wi-Fi

What Wi-Fi Can Do for You

The camera can connect via Wi-Fi wireless networks to a smart device running Nikon’s dedicated Wireless Mobile Utility app

( 0 225).

Download pictures Share pictures

Remote control

A

Installing the App

1 Find the app.

On the smart device, connect to the Google Play service, the App

Store, or another app marketplace and search for “Wireless Mobile

Utility”. For more information, see the instructions provided with the smart device.

2 Install the app.

Read the app description and install the app. A pdf manual for the

Wireless Mobile Utility is available for download at the following

URLs:

Android: http://nikonimglib.com/ManDL/WMAU/

iOS: http://nikonimglib.com/ManDL/WMAU-ios/

iOS

224 Wi-Fi

Android

Accessing the Camera

Before connecting via Wi-Fi (wireless LAN), install the Wireless

Mobile Utility on your Android or iOS smart device. Instructions for accessing the camera vary with the type of connection used by the smart device.

Android

• Push-button WPS: If the smart device supports push-button WPS

(i.e., has a WPS button connection option in its Wi-Fi

settings menu), you can use this easy method to connect to the smart device (

0 226)

• PIN-entry WPS: If the smart device supports WPS, you can use the camera to establish a connection by entering the PIN

displayed by the smart device (

0 228)

View SSID: If the smart device does not support WPS, you can connect by selecting the camera SSID on the smart device

iOS

(

0 229)

• View SSID: Connect by selecting the camera SSID on the smart

device (

0 229)

D

Security

If you do not use WPS when connecting for the first time, the connection will not be protected by a password or other form of security. Security settings can be configured in the Wireless Mobile

Utility once a connection is established. More information can be found in the Wireless Mobile Utility manual, which is available for download in pdf format from the following URLs:

• Android: http://nikonimglib.com/ManDL/WMAU/

• iOS: http://nikonimglib.com/ManDL/WMAU-ios/

Wi-Fi

225

WPS (Android Only)

1

Enable the camera’s built-in Wi-Fi.

Highlight Wi-Fi in the setup menu and press 2. Highlight Network

connection and press

2, then highlight Enable and press

J. Wait a few seconds for Wi-Fi to activate.

2

Connect.

Enable WPS button connections on the camera and smart device:

• Camera: Highlight Network settings and press

2.

Highlight Push-button WPS and press

2 to ready the camera for a

WPS connection. The camera will wait about two minutes for a WPS connection request from the smart device. To extend the wait time, press

J.

• Smart device: Select Wi-Fi settings > WPS button

connection.

226 Wi-Fi

3

Launch the Wireless Mobile Utility.

Launch the Wireless Mobile Utility on the smart device. The main dialog will be displayed.

Wi-Fi

227

PIN Entry (Android Only)

1

Enable the camera’s built-in Wi-Fi.

Highlight Wi-Fi in the setup menu and press 2. Highlight Network

connection and press

2, then highlight Enable and press

J. Wait a few seconds for Wi-Fi to activate.

2

Select Network settings > PIN-entry WPS.

Highlight Network settings and press 2.

Highlight PIN-entry WPS and press

2.

3

Enter the PIN.

Enter the PIN displayed by the smart device. Press 4 or 2 to highlight digits and press 1 or 3 to change. Press J when entry is complete.

4

Launch the Wireless Mobile Utility.

Launch the Wireless Mobile Utility on the smart device. The main dialog will be displayed.

228 Wi-Fi

SSID (Android and iOS)

1

Enable the camera’s built-in Wi-Fi.

Highlight Wi-Fi in the setup menu and press 2. Highlight Network

connection and press

2, then highlight Enable and press

J. Wait a few seconds for Wi-Fi to activate.

2

Display the camera SSID.

Highlight Network settings and press 2.

Highlight View SSID and press 2.

3

Select the camera SSID.

Select the camera SSID in the list of networks displayed by the smart device.

4

Launch the Wireless Mobile Utility.

Launch the Wireless Mobile Utility on the smart device. The main dialog will be displayed.

Wi-Fi

229

❚❚ Terminating the Connection

Wi-Fi can be disabled by:

Selecting Wi-Fi > Network connection > Disable in the camera setup menu

Starting movie recording

Turning the camera off

❚❚ Restoring Default Settings

To restore default network settings, select Wi-Fi > Network

settings > Reset network settings. A confirmation dialog will be displayed; highlight Yes and press J to restore default network settings.

A

The Wi-Fi Display

While Wi-Fi is enabled, a c icon will flash in the information display. The icon will stop flashing once a connection has been established and the camera is exchanging data with the smart device.

D

Wi-Fi

Read the warnings on pages xx to xxii before using the Wi-Fi function.

To disable Wi-Fi in settings in which its use is prohibited, select Wi-Fi >

Network connection > Disable in the camera setup menu. Note that

Eye-Fi cards can not be used while Wi-Fi is enabled and that the standby timer will not turn off while the Wireless Mobile Utility app on the smart device is communicating with the camera. If no data are exchanged for about 5 minutes, the standby timer will turn off. The camera Wi-Fi function is only available when a memory card is inserted and can not be used when a USB or HDMI cable is connected. To prevent loss of power while connected, charge the battery before enabling the network connection.

230 Wi-Fi

Selecting Pictures for Upload

Follow the steps below to select photos for upload to the smart device. Movies can not be selected for upload.

Selecting Individual Pictures for Upload

1

Select an image.

Display the image or highlight it in the thumbnail list in thumbnail or calendar playback.

2

Display playback options.

Press the P button to display playback options.

3

Choose Select to send to smart device/deselect.

Highlight Select to send to smart

device/deselect and press J.

Pictures selected for upload are indicated by a

& icon; to deselect, display or highlight the image and repeat Steps 2 and 3.

P button

Wi-Fi

231

Selecting Multiple Pictures for Upload

To change the upload status of multiple pictures, use the Select

to send to smart device option in the playback menu.

1

Choose Select to send to smart device.

Highlight Select to send to smart

device in the playback menu and press 2.

2

Select pictures.

Use the multi selector to highlight pictures and press

W (Q) to select or deselect (to view the highlighted picture full screen, press and hold the

X button). Selected pictures are marked by a

& icon.

W (Q) button

3

Press

J.

Press

J to complete the operation.

232 Wi-Fi

Camera Menus

D The Playback Menu: Managing Images

To display the playback menu, press

G and select the D

(playback menu) tab.

G button

Playback Menu Options

The playback menu contains the following options:

Option

Delete

Playback folder

Playback display options

Image review

Auto image rotation

Rotate tall

Slide show

Image type

Frame interval

DPOF print order

Rating

Select to send to smart device

Default

All

On

On

On

Still images and movies

2 s

0

206

234

234

234

235

235

208

218

204

232

D The Playback Menu: Managing Images 233

Playback Folder

G button

➜ D playback menu

Choose a folder for playback:

Option

D5500

All

Current

Description

Pictures in all folders created with the D5500 will be visible during playback.

Pictures in all folders will be visible during playback.

Only photos in the folder currently selected for Storage

folder in the shooting menu (

0 238) are displayed during

playback.

Playback Display Options

G button

➜ D playback menu

Choose the information available in the playback photo information display

( 0 192). Press 1 or 3 to highlight and

press 2 to select or deselect. Selected items are indicated by check marks. To return to the playback menu, press

J.

Image Review

G button

➜ D playback menu

Choose whether pictures are automatically displayed in the monitor immediately after shooting.

234 D The Playback Menu: Managing Images

Auto Image Rotation

G button

➜ D playback menu

Photographs taken while On is selected contain information on camera orientation, allowing them to be rotated automatically during playback or when viewed in ViewNX 2 or Capture NX-D

(

0 210). The following orientations are recorded:

Landscape (wide) orientation

Camera rotated 90° clockwise

Camera rotated 90° counterclockwise

Camera orientation is not recorded when Off is selected.

Choose this option when panning or taking photographs with the lens pointing up or down.

A

Rotate Tall

To automatically rotate “tall” (portrait-orientation) photographs for display during playback, select On for the Rotate tall option.

Rotate Tall

G button

➜ D playback menu

If On is selected, “tall” (portrait-orientation) pictures will be automatically rotated for display in the monitor (pictures taken with Off selected for Auto image rotation will still be displayed in landscape orientation). Note that because the camera itself is already in the appropriate orientation during shooting, images are not rotated automatically during image review.

D The Playback Menu: Managing Images 235

C The Shooting Menu: Shooting Options

To display the shooting menu, press G and select the

C (shooting menu) tab.

G button

Shooting Menu Options

The shooting menu contains the following options:

Option

Reset shooting menu

Storage folder

File naming

Image quality

Image size

NEF (RAW) recording

ISO sensitivity settings

ISO sensitivity P

, S, A, M

Other modes

Auto ISO sensitivity control

White balance

Fluorescent

Set Picture Control

Manage Picture Control

Color space

Active D-Lighting

HDR (high dynamic range)

Default

DSC

JPEG normal

Large

14-bit

100

Auto

Off

Auto

Cool-white fluorescent

Standard

— sRGB

Auto

Off

0

237

238

240

90

92

240

99

241

137

138

152

158

243

133

135

236 C The Shooting Menu: Shooting Options

Option

Release mode

m, w

Other modes

Long exposure NR

High ISO NR

Vignette control

Auto distortion control

Interval timer shooting

Start options

Interval

Number of times

Exposure smoothing

Optical VR

1

Movie settings

Frame size/frame rate

2

Movie quality

Microphone

Wind noise reduction

Manual movie settings

Default

Continuous H

Single frame

Off

Normal

Normal

Off

Now

1 min.

1

Off

On

Normal

Auto sensitivity

Off

Off

0

71

243

244

244

245

102

102

103

103

245

177

1 Available only with lenses that support this item.

2 Default varies with country of purchase.

Note

: Depending on camera settings, some items may be grayed out and unavailable.

Reset Shooting Menu

G button

➜ C shooting menu

Select Yes to reset shooting menu settings.

C The Shooting Menu: Shooting Options 237

Storage Folder

G button

➜ C shooting menu

Select the folder in which subsequent images will be stored.

❚❚ Selecting Folders by Folder Number

1

Choose Select folder by number.

Highlight Select folder by number and press

2.

2

Choose a folder number.

Press 4 or 2 to highlight a digit, press 1 or 3 to change. If a folder with the selected number already exists, a W, X, or Y icon will be displayed to the left of the folder number:

W : Folder is empty.

X : Folder is partially full.

Y : Folder contains 999 pictures or a picture numbered

9999. No further pictures can be stored in this folder.

3

Save changes and exit.

Press

J to complete the operation and return to the main menu (to exit without choosing the storage folder, press the

G button). If a folder with the specified number does not already exist, a new folder will be created. Subsequent photographs will be stored in the selected folder unless it is already full.

238 C The Shooting Menu: Shooting Options

❚❚ Selecting Folders from a List

1

Choose Select folder from list.

Highlight Select folder from list and press 2.

2

Highlight a folder.

Press

1 or 3 to highlight a folder.

3

Select the highlighted folder.

Press J to select the highlighted folder and return to the main menu. Subsequent photographs will be stored in the selected folder.

D

Folder and File Numbers

If the current folder is numbered 999 and contains 999 pictures or a picture numbered 9999, the shutter-release will be disabled and no further photographs can be taken. To continue shooting, create a folder with a number less than 999, or select an existing folder with a number less than 999 and less than 999 images.

A

Startup Time

Additional time may be required for camera startup if the memory card contains a very large number of files or folders.

C The Shooting Menu: Shooting Options 239

File Naming

G button

➜ C shooting menu

Photographs are saved using file names consisting of “DSC_” or, in the case of images that use the Adobe RGB color space

(

0 243), “_DSC”, followed by a four-digit number and a three-

letter extension (e.g., “DSC_0001.JPG”). The File naming option is used to select three letters to replace the “DSC” portion of the

file name. For information on editing file names, see page 159.

A

Extensions

The following extensions are used: “.NEF” for NEF (RAW) images, “.JPG” for JPEG images, “.MOV” for movies, and “.NDF” for dust off reference data. In each pair of photographs recorded at image-quality settings of

NEF (RAW)+JPEG, the NEF and JPEG images have the same file names but different extensions.

NEF (RAW) Recording

G button

➜ C shooting menu

Choose the bit depth for NEF (RAW) images.

Option

( 12-bit

) 14-bit

Description

NEF (RAW) images are recorded at a bit depth of 12 bits.

NEF (RAW) images are recorded at a bit depth of 14 bits, producing larger files but increasing the amount of color data recorded.

240 C The Shooting Menu: Shooting Options

ISO Sensitivity Settings

Adjust ISO sensitivity (

0 99).

G button

➜ C shooting menu

❚❚ Auto ISO Sensitivity control

If Off is chosen for Auto ISO sensitivity control in P, S, A, and M modes, ISO sensitivity will remain fixed at the value selected by

the user ( 0 99). When On is chosen, ISO sensitivity will

automatically be adjusted if optimal exposure can not be achieved at the value selected by the user. The maximum value for auto ISO sensitivity can be selected using the Maximum

sensitivity option in the Auto ISO sensitivity control menu

(choose lower values to prevent noise (randomly-spaced bright pixels, fog, or lines), but note that if the ISO sensitivity selected by the user is higher than that chosen for Maximum sensitivity, the value selected by the user will be used instead; the minimum value for auto ISO sensitivity is automatically set to ISO 100). In modes P and A, sensitivity will only be adjusted if underexposure would result at the shutter speed selected for Minimum shutter

speed (

1

/

2000

–30 s, or Auto; in modes S and M, sensitivity will be adjusted for optimal exposure at the shutter speed selected by the user). If Auto (available only with CPU lenses) is selected, the camera will choose the minimum shutter speed based on the focal length of the lens (auto shutter-speed selection can be fine-tuned by highlighting Auto and pressing

2). Slower shutter speeds will be used only if optimal exposure can not be achieved at the ISO sensitivity value selected for Maximum

sensitivity.

C The Shooting Menu: Shooting Options 241

When On is selected, the viewfinder shows ISO AUTO and the information display ISO-A. These indicators flash when sensitivity is altered from the value selected by the user.

A

Maximum Sensitivity/Minimum Shutter Speed

When auto ISO sensitivity control is enabled, the ISO sensitivity and shutter speed graphics in the information display show the maximum sensitivity and minimum shutter speed.

Minimum shutter speed

Maximum sensitivity

A

Auto ISO Sensitivity Control

Noise (randomly-spaced bright pixels, fog, or lines) is more likely at higher sensitivities. Use the High ISO NR option in the shooting menu to reduce noise (

0 244). Note that ISO sensitivity may be raised

automatically when auto ISO sensitivity control is used in combination with slow sync flash modes (available with the built-in flash and the

optional flash units listed on page 323), possibly preventing the

camera from selecting slow shutter speeds. Auto ISO sensitivity

control is available only in i-TTL flash control mode (

0 259, 325); in

other modes, the value selected for ISO sensitivity will be used for pictures taken with the built-in flash or optional flash units.

242 C The Shooting Menu: Shooting Options

Color Space

G button

➜ C shooting menu

The color space determines the gamut of colors available for color reproduction. sRGB is recommended for general-purpose printing and display; Adobe RGB, with its broader gamut of colors, for professional publication and commercial printing.

Regardless of the option selected, movies are recorded in sRGB.

A

Adobe RGB

For accurate color reproduction, Adobe RGB images require applications, displays, and printers that support color management.

A

Color Space

ViewNX 2 and Capture NX-D (

0 210) automatically select the correct

color space when opening photographs created with this camera.

Results can not be guaranteed with third-party software.

Long Exposure NR

G button

➜ C shooting menu

If On is selected, photographs taken at shutter speeds slower than 1 s will be processed to reduce noise (bright spots or fog). The time required for processing roughly doubles; during processing, “ l m” will flash in the viewfinder and pictures can not be taken (noise reduction will not be performed if the camera is turned off before processing is complete).

C The Shooting Menu: Shooting Options 243

High ISO NR

G button

➜ C shooting menu

Photographs taken at high ISO sensitivities can be processed to reduce “noise.”

Option Description

High

Reduce noise (randomly-spaced bright pixels), particularly

Normal

in photographs taken at high ISO sensitivities. Choose the amount of noise reduction performed from High, Normal,

Low

and Low.

Off

Noise reduction is performed only as required and never at an amount higher than when Low is selected.

Vignette Control

G button

➜ C shooting menu

“Vignetting” is a drop in brightness at the edges of a photograph. Vignette control reduces vignetting for type G, E, and D lenses (PC lenses excluded). Its effects vary from lens to lens and are most noticeable at maximum aperture. Choose from High, Normal, Low, and Off.

A

Vignette Control

Depending on the scene, shooting conditions, and type of lens, JPEG images may exhibit noise (fog) or variations in peripheral brightness, while custom Picture Controls and preset Picture Controls that have been modified from default settings may not produce the desired effect. Take test shots and view the results in the monitor. Vignette

control does not apply to movies (

0 174) or to pictures taken with

lenses that support FX format.

244 C The Shooting Menu: Shooting Options

Auto Distortion Control

G button

➜ C shooting menu

Select On to reduce barrel distortion in photos taken with wideangle lenses and to reduce pin-cushion distortion in photos taken with long lenses (note that the edges of the area visible in the viewfinder may be cropped out of the final photograph, and that the time needed to process photographs before recording begins may increase). This option does not apply to movies and is available only with type G, E, and D lenses (PC, fisheye, and certain other lenses excluded); results are not guaranteed with other lenses.

Optical VR

G button

➜ C shooting menu

This item is displayed only with lenses that support it. Selecting

On enables vibration reduction, which takes effect whenever

the shutter-release button is pressed halfway (

0 379). Select Off

to disable vibration reduction.

A

The Vibration Reduction Indicator

A vibration reduction indicator appears in the information display when On is selected for Optical VR.

C The Shooting Menu: Shooting Options 245

A Custom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings

To display the Custom Settings menu, press G and select the

A (Custom Settings menu) tab.

G button

Custom Settings are used to customize camera settings to suit individual preferences.

Main menu Custom Setting groups

Reset custom settings (

0 248)

246 A Custom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings

Custom Settings

The following Custom Settings are available:

Custom Setting

Reset custom settings a Autofocus

a1 AF-C priority selection a2 Number of focus points a3 Built-in AF-assist illuminator a4

Rangefinder a5 Manual focus ring in AF mode

*

b Exposure

b1 EV steps for exposure cntrl b2 ISO display

c Timers/AE lock

c1 Shutter-release button AE-L c2 Auto off timers c3 Self-timer

Default

Focus

39 points

On

Off

Enable

1/3 step

Off

Off

Normal

Self-timer delay: 10 s; number of shots: 1

1 min c4 Remote on duration (ML-L3)

d Shooting/display

d1

Exposure delay mode d2 File number sequence d3 Viewfinder grid display d4 Date stamp d5 Reverse indicators

e Bracketing/flash

e1

Flash cntrl for built-in flash/

Optional flash e2

Auto bracketing set

Off

Off

Off

Off

TTL

AE bracketing

259

264

0

248

252

253

254

254

254

255

256

256

258

248

249

250

250

251

252

252

A Custom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings 247

f Controls

f1 f2 f3 f4

Custom Setting

Assign Fn button

Assign AE-L/AF-L button

Assign touch Fn

Reverse dial rotation

* Available only with lenses that support this item.

Default

0

ISO sensitivity

Exposure compensation: U

Shutter speed/aperture: U

265

AE/AF lock

267

Viewfinder grid display

268

269

Note

: Depending on camera settings, some items may be grayed out and unavailable.

Reset Custom Settings

G button

➜ A Custom Settings menu

Select Yes to restore Custom Settings to their default values.

a: Autofocus

a1: AF-C Priority Selection

G button

➜ A Custom Settings menu

When AF-C is selected for viewfinder photography (

0 78), this

option controls whether photographs can be taken whenever the shutter-release button is pressed (release priority) or only when the camera is in focus (focus priority).

Option

G

Release

F Focus

Description

Photos can be taken whenever the shutter-release button is pressed.

Photos can only be taken once the camera has focused.

248 A Custom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings

a2: Number of Focus Points

G button

➜ A Custom Settings menu

Choose the number of focus points available for manual focuspoint selection.

Option Description

Choose from the 39 focus points shown at right.

# 39 points

A 11 points

Choose from the 11 focus points shown at right.

Use for quick focus-point selection.

A Custom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings 249

a3: Built-in AF-assist Illuminator

G button

➜ A Custom Settings menu

Choose whether the built-in AF-assist illuminator lights to assist the focus operation when lighting is poor.

AF-assist illuminator

Option

On

Off

Description

The AF-assist illuminator lights when lighting is poor (for

more information, see page 352).

The AF-assist illuminator does not light to assist the focus operation. The camera may not be able to focus using autofocus when lighting is poor.

a4: Rangefinder

G button

➜ A Custom Settings menu

Choose On to use the exposure indicator to determine whether

the camera is correctly focused in manual focus mode ( 0 88;

note that this function is not available in shooting mode M, when the exposure indicator instead shows whether the subject is correctly exposed).

Indicator Description

Subject in focus.

Focus point is slightly in front of subject.

250 A Custom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings

Indicator Description

Focus point is well in front of subject.

Focus point is slightly behind subject.

Focus point is well behind subject.

Camera can not determine correct focus.

A

Using the Electronic Rangefinder

The electronic rangefinder requires a lens with a maximum aperture of f/5.6 or faster. The desired results may not be achieved in situations in

which the camera would be unable to focus using autofocus ( 0 80).

The electronic rangefinder is not available during live view.

a5: Manual Focus Ring in AF Mode

G button

➜ A Custom Settings menu

This item is displayed only with lenses that support it. Selecting

Enable allows the lens focus ring to be used for manual focus when the camera is in autofocus mode. After pressing the shutter-release button halfway to focus, keep the button pressed halfway and adjust focus using the focus ring. To refocus using autofocus, lift your finger from the shutter-release button and then press it halfway again. To prevent the lens focus ring being used for manual focus when the camera is in autofocus mode, select Disable.

A Custom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings 251

b: Exposure

b1: EV Steps for Exposure Cntrl

G button

➜ A Custom Settings menu

Select the increments used when making adjustments to shutter speed, aperture, exposure and flash compensation, and bracketing.

b2: ISO Display

G button

➜ A Custom Settings menu

Select On to display ISO sensitivity in the viewfinder in place of the number of exposures remaining.

c: Timers/AE Lock

c1: Shutter-Release Button AE-L

G button

➜ A Custom Settings menu

If On is selected, exposure will lock when the shutter-release button is pressed halfway.

252 A Custom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings

c2: Auto off Timers

G button

➜ A Custom Settings menu

This option determines how long the monitor remains on if no operations are performed during menu display and playback

(Playback/menus), while photographs are displayed in the monitor after shooting (Image review), and during live view

(Live view), and how long the standby timer, viewfinder, and information display remain on when no operations are performed (Standby timer). Choose shorter auto-off delays to reduce the drain on the battery.

Option

C Short

D Normal

E Long

F Custom

Description (all times are approximate)

Auto off timers are set to the following values:

Short

Normal

Long

Playback/ menus

20 s

5 min.

10 min.

Image review

4 s

4 s

20 s

Live view

5 min.

10 min.

20 min.

Standby timer

4 s

8 s

1 min.

Choose separate delays for Playback/menus, Image

review, Live view, and Standby timer. When settings are complete, press J.

A

Auto off Timers

The monitor and viewfinder will not turn off automatically when the camera is connected to a computer or printer via USB.

A Custom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings 253

c3: Self-Timer

G button

➜ A Custom Settings menu

Choose the length of the shutter release delay and the number of shots taken.

• Self-timer delay: Choose the length of the shutter-release delay.

• Number of shots: Press

1 and 3 to choose the number of shots taken each time the shutter-release button is pressed (from 1 to 9; if a value other than 1 is selected, shots will be taken at intervals of about 4 seconds).

c4: Remote on Duration (ML-L3)

G button

➜ A Custom Settings menu

Choose how long the camera will wait for a signal from the optional ML-L3 remote control before cancelling remote release mode. Choose shorter times for longer battery life. This setting applies only during viewfinder photography.

d: Shooting/Display

d1: Exposure Delay Mode

G button

➜ A Custom Settings menu

In situations where the slightest camera movement can blur pictures, select On to delay shutter release until about 1 s after the shutter-release button is pressed and the mirror is raised.

254 A Custom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings

d2: File Number Sequence

G button

➜ A Custom Settings menu

When a photograph is taken, the camera names the file by adding one to the last file number used. This option controls whether file numbering continues from the last number used when a new folder is created, the memory card is formatted, or a new memory card is inserted in the camera.

Option

On

Off

Reset

Description

When a new folder is created, the memory card formatted, or a new memory card inserted in the camera, file numbering continues from the last number used or from the largest file number in the current folder, whichever is higher. If a photograph is taken when the current folder contains a photograph numbered 9999, a new folder will be created automatically and file numbering will begin again from 0001.

File numbering is reset to 0001 when a new folder is created, the memory card is formatted, or a new memory card is inserted in the camera. Note that a new folder is created automatically if a photograph is taken when the current folder contains 999 photographs.

As for On, except that the next photograph taken is assigned a file number by adding one to the largest file number in the current folder. If the folder is empty, file numbering is reset to

0001.

D

File Number Sequence

If the current folder is numbered 999 and contains either 999 photographs or a photograph numbered 9999, the shutter-release button will be disabled and no further photographs can be taken.

Choose Reset for Custom Setting d2 (File number sequence) and then either format the current memory card or insert a new memory card.

A Custom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings 255

d3: Viewfinder Grid Display

G button

➜ A Custom Settings menu

Choose On to display on-demand grid lines in the viewfinder for reference when composing photographs (

0 5).

d4: Date Stamp

G button

➜ A Custom Settings menu

Choose the date information imprinted on photographs as they are taken. Date stamps can not be added to or removed from existing photos.

a b c

Option

Off

Date

Date and time

Date counter

Description

The time and date do not appear on photographs.

The date or date and time are imprinted on photographs taken while this option is in effect.

New photos are imprinted with a time stamp showing the number of days between the date of shooting and a selected date (see below).

At settings other than Off, the selected option is indicated by a d icon in the information display.

A

Date Stamp

The date is recorded in the order selected for Time zone and date

( 0 275). The imprinted data may be cropped out or rendered illegible

in copies created when images are retouched (

0 286). The date does

not appear on NEF (RAW) or NEF (RAW)+JPEG images.

256 A Custom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings

❚❚ Date Counter

Pictures taken while this option is in effect are imprinted with the number of days remaining until a future date or the number of days elapsed since a past date.

Use it to track the growth of a child or count down the days until a birthday or wedding.

Future date (two days remaining) Past date (two days elapsed)

The camera offers three slots for storing dates.

1

Enter the first date.

The first time you select Date counter, you will be prompted to enter a date for the first slot. Enter a date using the multi selector and press J to exit to the date list.

2

Enter additional dates or edit existing dates.

To change a date or enter additional dates, highlight a slot, press 2, and enter a date as described above.

3

Choose a date.

Highlight a slot in the date list and press J.

A Custom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings 257

4

Choose a date counter format.

Highlight Display options and press

2, then highlight a date format and press J.

5

Exit the date counter menu.

Press

J to exit the date counter menu.

d5: Reverse Indicators

G button

➜ A Custom Settings menu the viewfinder and information display are displayed with positive values on the left and negative values on the right. the left and positive values on the right.

258 A Custom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings

e: Bracketing/Flash

e1: Flash Cntrl for Built-in Flash/Optional Flash

G button

➜ A Custom Settings menu

Choose the flash mode for the built-in flash in P, S, A, and M modes. When an optional SB-500, SB-400, or SB-300 flash unit is attached and turned on, this option changes to Optional flash and is used to choose the flash mode for the optional flash unit.

Option

1 TTL

2 Manual

4

Commander mode

Description

Flash output is adjusted automatically in response to shooting conditions.

Choose a flash level. At full power, the built-in flash has a Guide Number of 12/39 (m/ft., ISO 100,

20 °C/68 °F).

This option is available when an optional SB-500 flash unit is mounted on the camera accessory shoe. In commander mode, the SB-500 functions as a master flash for wireless remote control of

groups of optional off-camera flash units (

0 260).

A

Manual

A

Y icon flashes in the viewfinder and 0 flashes in the information display when

Manual is selected and the flash is raised.

A Custom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings 259

A

TTL Flash Control

The following types of flash control are supported when a CPU lens is

used in combination with the built-in flash (

0 93) or optional flash

units (

0 323).

• i-TTL Balanced Fill-Flash for Digital SLR: Information from the 2016-pixel

RGB sensor is used to adjust flash output for a natural balance between the main subject and the background.

• Standard i-TTL Fill-Flash for Digital SLR: Flash output is adjusted for the main subject; the brightness of the background is not taken into account.

Standard i-TTL flash control is used with spot metering or when selected with the optional flash unit. i-TTL balanced fill-flash for digital

SLR is used in all other cases.

❚❚ Commander Mode

When an optional SB-500 flash unit is mounted on the accessory shoe, select Commander mode to use the SB-500 as a master flash controlling one or more remote optional flash units in up to two groups (A and B) using advanced wireless lighting (

0 325).

Selecting this option displays the menu shown at right. Press

4 or 2 to highlight the following options,

1 or 3 to change.

260 A Custom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings

Option

Optional flash

Description

Choose a flash mode for the master (commander) flash.

TTL

i-TTL mode. Choose flash compensation from values between +3.0 and –3.0 EV in increments of

1

/

3

EV.

M

– –

Choose the flash level.

Only the remote flash units fire; the master flash does not, although it does emit monitor pre-flashes.

Group A

Choose a flash mode for all flash units in group A.

TTL

AA

M

– –

Group B

Channel

i-TTL mode. Choose flash compensation from values between +3.0 and –3.0 EV in increments of

1

/

3

EV.

Auto aperture (available only with compatible flash units;

0 325). Choose flash compensation from values between

+3.0 and –3.0 EV in increments of

1

/

3

EV.

Choose the flash level.

The flash units in this group do not fire.

Choose a flash mode for all flash units in group B. The options available are the same as those listed for Group A, above.

Choose from channels 1–4. All flash units in both groups must be set to the same channel.

A Custom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings 261

Follow the steps below to take photographs in commander mode.

1

Adjust settings for the master flash.

Choose the flash control mode and output level for the master flash. Note that output level can not be adjusted in – – mode.

2

Adjust settings for group A.

Choose the flash control mode and output level for the flash units in group A.

3

Adjust settings for group B.

Choose the flash control mode and output level for the flash units in group B.

4

Select the channel.

If the remote flash units include an

SB-500, select channel 3.

5

Press

J.

262 A Custom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings

6

Compose the shot.

Compose the shot and arrange the flash units as shown below. Note that the maximum distance at which the remote flash units can be placed may vary with shooting conditions.

Group A: 10 m/32 ft or less

Group B: 7 m/22 ft or less

60 ° or less

Master flash

(SB-500, mounted on camera)

Wireless remote sensors on flash units should face camera

7

Configure the remote flash units.

Turn all the remote flash units on, adjust group settings as desired, and set them to the channel selected in Step 4. See the flash unit instruction manuals for details.

8

Frame the photograph, focus, and shoot.

After confirming that the camera flash-ready light and the flash-ready lights for all flash units are lit, frame the photograph, focus, and shoot.

A

The Flash Sync Mode Display

M does not appear in the information display when – – is selected for

Optional flash > Mode.

A Custom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings 263

A

Flash Compensation

The flash compensation value selected with the M (Y) and E (N) buttons and command dial is added to the flash compensation values selected for the master flash, group A, and group B in the Commander

mode menu. A

Y icon is displayed in the viewfinder when a flash compensation value other than ±0 is selected for the master or remote flash units in TTL or AA mode. The Y icon flashes when the master flash is in mode M.

D

Commander Mode

Position the sensor windows on the remote flash units to pick up the light from the master flash (particular care is required if the camera is not mounted on a tripod). The remote flash units should normally be placed closer to the subject than to the camera. Be sure that direct light or strong reflections from the remote flash units do not enter the camera lens (in TTL mode) or the photocells on the remote flash units

(AA mode), as this may interfere with exposure. To prevent timing flashes emitted by the master flash from appearing in photographs taken at short range, choose low ISO sensitivities or small apertures

(high f-numbers) or rotate the flash head on the master flash to point upwards. After positioning the remote flash units, take a test shot and view the results in the camera monitor.

Although there is no limit on the number of remote flash units that may be used, the practical maximum is three. With more than this number, the light emitted by the remote flash units will interfere with performance.

e2: Auto Bracketing Set

G button

➜ A Custom Settings menu

Choose the setting (exposure, white balance, or Active

D-Lighting) varied when bracketing is in effect (

0 148).

264 A Custom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings

f: Controls

f1: Assign Fn Button

G button

➜ A Custom Settings menu

Choose the role played by the Fn button.

Fn

button

v w m

!

Option

Image quality/size

ISO sensitivity

White balance

Active

D-Lighting

$ HDR

& +NEF (RAW)

Description

Keeping the Fn button pressed, rotate the command dial to select image quality and size

(

0 90).

Keeping the Fn button pressed, rotate the command dial to select ISO sensitivity (

0 99).

Keeping the Fn button pressed, rotate the command dial to select white balance (P, S, A, and M modes only;

0 137).

Keeping the Fn button pressed, rotate the command dial to select Active D-Lighting (P, S, A, and M modes only;

0 133).

Keeping the Fn button pressed, rotate the command dial to adjust HDR (P, S, A, and M modes only;

0 135).

If image quality is set to JPEG fine, JPEG normal, or JPEG basic, an NEF (RAW) copy will be recorded with the next picture taken after the Fn button is pressed. To exit without recording an NEF (RAW) copy, press the Fn button again. This option has no effect in the following special effects modes:

%, S,

T, U, ', (, and 3.

A Custom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings 265

t

"

'

Option

Auto bracketing

AF-area mode

Viewfinder grid display

Description

Keeping the Fn button pressed, rotate the command dial to choose the bracketing increment

(exposure and white balance bracketing) or to turn

ADL bracketing on or off (P, S, A, and M modes only;

0 148).

Keeping the Fn button pressed, rotate the command dial to choose an AF-area mode (

0 82).

Press the Fn button to display or hide the viewfinder framing grid.

c

Wi-Fi

Press the Fn button to display the Wi-Fi menu

( 0 226).

266 A Custom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings

f2: Assign AE-L/AF-L Button

G button

➜ A Custom Settings menu

Choose the role played by the A (L) button.

A (L) button

Option Description

B

AE/AF lock

Focus and exposure lock while the A (L) button is pressed.

C

AE lock only Exposure locks while the

A (L) button is pressed.

E

AE lock

(Hold)

Exposure locks when the

A (L) button is pressed, and remains locked until the button is pressed a second time or the standby timer expires.

F AF lock only Focus locks while the A (L) button is pressed.

A AF-ON

The A (L) button initiates autofocus. The shutter-release button can not be used to focus.

A Custom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings 267

f3: Assign Touch Fn

G button

➜ A Custom Settings menu

A touch-sensitive area of the monitor can be used to control the camera after the monitor has turned off automatically. The position of this “touch Fn” area varies with the position of the monitor; the role it plays can be chosen from the options in the table below. Slide your finger left or right across the area indicated in the illustration to adjust the chosen option (note that touch Fn is not available when the monitor is facing forward). If you find that your face contacts the touch Fn area when you look through the viewfinder, use the monitor in the extended position.

Touch Fn area

Monitor in normal position Monitor extended

# w

!

Option

Focus-point selection

ISO sensitivity

Active

D-Lighting

$ HDR

Description

When an option other than e (Auto-area AF) is selected for AF-area mode, you can slide a finger over the touch Fn area to position the focus point

(

0 85).

Slide a finger over the touch Fn area to adjust ISO sensitivity (

0 99).

Slide a finger over the touch Fn area to adjust

Active D-Lighting (P, S, A, and M modes only;

0 133).

Slide a finger over the touch Fn area to adjust HDR

(P, S, A, and M modes only;

0 135).

268 A Custom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings

t

"

'

Option

Auto bracketing

AF-area mode

Viewfinder grid display

Description

Slide a finger over the touch Fn area to choose the bracketing increment (exposure and white balance bracketing) or to turn ADL bracketing on

or off (P, S, A, and M modes only;

0 148).

Slide a finger over the touch Fn area to choose an

AF-area mode (

0 82).

Tap the touch Fn area to display or hide the viewfinder framing grid.

%

Aperture

None

Slide a finger over the touch Fn area to adjust aperture (A and M modes only;

0 118, 119).

Disable touch Fn.

D

Touch Fn

Touch Fn is available only if Enable is selected for Touch controls

(

0 276) and Info display auto off (0 278) is on.

f4: Reverse Dial Rotation

G button

➜ A Custom Settings menu

Reverse the direction of rotation of the command dial when it is used to make adjustments to exposure or flash compensation (Exposure

compensation) and/or shutter speed and aperture (Shutter speed/aperture).

Highlight options and press

2 to select or deselect, then press

J.

A Custom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings 269

B The Setup Menu: Camera Setup

To display the setup menu, press G and select the B (setup menu) tab.

G button

Setup Menu Options

The setup menu contains the following options:

Option

Format memory card

Image comment

Copyright information

Time zone and date

1

Daylight saving time

Language

1

Beep options

Beep on/off

Pitch

Touch controls

Monitor brightness

Info display format

AUTO/SCENE/EFFECTS

P/S/A/M

Auto info display

Info display auto off

Clean image sensor

Clean at startup/shutdown

Default

Off

On

Low

Enable

0

Graphic

Graphic

On

On

Clean at startup & shutdown

277

278

278

338

0

272

273

274

275

275

276

276

276

276

270 B The Setup Menu: Camera Setup

Option

Lock mirror up for cleaning

2

Image Dust Off ref photo

Flicker reduction

Slot empty release lock

Video mode

1

HDMI

Output resolution

Device control

Accessory terminal

Remote control

Remote shutter release

Assign Fn button

Location data

Standby timer

Set clock from satellite

Wi-Fi

Network connection

Network settings

Eye-Fi upload

3

Conformity marking

Firmware version

Default

Auto

Release locked

Auto

On

Take photos

Same as camera

Enable

Yes

Disable

Enable

0

340

279

281

281

281

223

282

4 button 282

283

283

226

284

285

285

1 Default varies with country of purchase.

2 Not available when battery is low.

3 Only available when compatible Eye-Fi memory card is inserted.

Note

: Depending on camera settings, some items may be grayed out and unavailable.

B The Setup Menu: Camera Setup 271

Format Memory Card

G button

➜ B setup menu

Memory cards must be formatted before first use or after being formatted in other devices. Format the card as described below.

D

Formatting Memory Cards

Formatting memory cards permanently deletes any data they may

contain.

Be sure to copy any photographs and other data you wish to keep to a computer before proceeding (

0 211).

1

Highlight Yes.

To exit without formatting the memory card, highlight No and press

J.

2

Press

J.

A message will be displayed while the card is formatted. Do not remove the

memory card or remove or disconnect the power source until formatting is

complete.

272 B The Setup Menu: Camera Setup

Image Comment

G button

➜ B setup menu

Add a comment to new photographs as they are taken.

Comments can be viewed as metadata in ViewNX 2 or

Capture NX-D (

0 210). The comment is also visible on the

shooting data page in the photo information display (

0 197).

The following options are available:

• Input comment: Input a comment as described on page 159.

Comments can be up to 36 characters long.

• Attach comment: Select this option to attach the comment to all subsequent photographs. Attach comment can be turned on and off by highlighting it and pressing 2. After choosing the desired setting, press

J to exit.

B The Setup Menu: Camera Setup 273

Copyright Information

G button

➜ B setup menu

Add copyright information to new photographs as they are taken. Copyright information is included in the shooting data shown in the photo information display (

0 197) and can be

viewed as metadata in ViewNX 2 or in Capture NX-D (

0 210).

The following options are available:

• Artist: Enter a photographer name as described on page 159.

Photographer names can be up to 36 characters long.

• Copyright: Enter the name of the copyright holder as described

on page 159. Copyright holder names can be up to 54

characters long.

• Attach copyright information: Select this option to attach copyright information to all subsequent photographs. Attach copyright

information can be turned on and off by highlighting it and pressing 2.

After choosing the desired setting, press

J to exit.

D

Copyright Information

To prevent unauthorized use of the artist or copyright holder names, make sure that Attach copyright information is not selected and that the Artist and Copyright fields are blank before lending or transferring the camera to another person. Nikon does not accept liability for any damages or disputes arising from the use of the

Copyright information option.

274 B The Setup Menu: Camera Setup

Time Zone and Date

G button

➜ B setup menu

Change time zones, set the camera clock, choose the date display order, and turn daylight saving time on or off.

Option

Time zone

Description

Choose a time zone. The camera clock is automatically set to the time in the new time zone.

Date and time

Set the camera clock ( 0 32).

Date format

Choose the order in which the day, month, and year are displayed.

Daylight saving time

Turn daylight saving time on or off. The camera clock will automatically be advanced or set back one hour.

Language

G button

➜ B setup menu

Choose a language for camera menus and messages.

B The Setup Menu: Camera Setup 275

Beep Options

G button

➜ B setup menu

Beeps sound when the camera focuses, in self-timer and remotecontrol modes, and when touch-screen controls are used.

❚❚ Beep On/Off

Select Off (touch controls only) to mute the sounds the camera makes in response to touch-screen controls, or choose Off to prevent beeps from sounding altogether.

❚❚ Pitch

Choose the pitch (High or Low) of the sounds made in response to focus, self-timer, and remote-control operations.

Touch Controls

G button

➜ B setup menu

Select Disable to prevent accidental use of touch-screen controls (

0 17), or Playback only to enable touch-screen

controls in playback mode only.

Monitor Brightness

G button

➜ B setup menu

Press

1 or 3 to choose monitor brightness. Choose higher values for increased brightness, lower values for reduced brightness.

276 B The Setup Menu: Camera Setup

Info Display Format

G button

➜ B setup menu

Choose an information display format ( 0 8). Formats can be

chosen separately for auto, scene, and special effects modes and for P, S, A, and M modes.

Classic

1

Select a shooting mode option.

Highlight AUTO/SCENE/EFFECTS or

P/S/A/M and press 2.

Graphic

2

Select a design.

Highlight a design and press J.

B The Setup Menu: Camera Setup 277

Auto Info Display

G button

➜ B setup menu

If On is selected, the information display will appear after the shutter-release button is pressed halfway. If Off is selected, the information display can be viewed by pressing the

R button.

Info Display Auto Off

G button

➜ B setup menu

If On is selected, the eye sensor will turn the information display off when you put your eye to the viewfinder. Selecting Off prevents the display turning off when you look through the viewfinder, but also increases the drain on the battery.

278 B The Setup Menu: Camera Setup

Image Dust Off Ref Photo

G button

➜ B setup menu

Acquire reference data for the Image Dust Off option in

Capture NX-D (

0 210; for more information, refer to

Capture NX-D on-line help).

Image Dust Off ref photo is available only when a CPU lens is mounted on the camera. A lens with a focal length of at least

50 mm is recommended. When using a zoom lens, zoom all the way in.

1

Choose a start option.

Highlight one of the following options and press J. To exit without acquiring image dust off data, press

G.

• Start: The message shown at right will be displayed and “rEF” will appear in the viewfinder.

• Clean sensor and then start: Select this option to clean the image sensor before starting. The message shown at right will be displayed and “rEF” will appear in the viewfinder when cleaning is complete.

D

Image Sensor Cleaning

Image Dust Off reference data recorded before image sensor cleaning is performed can not be used with photographs taken after image sensor cleaning is performed. Select Clean sensor and

then start only if the Image Dust Off reference data will not be used with existing photographs.

B The Setup Menu: Camera Setup 279

2

Frame a featureless white object in the viewfinder.

With the lens about ten centimeters (four inches) from a welllit, featureless white object, frame the object so that it fills the viewfinder and then press the shutter-release button halfway.

In autofocus mode, focus will automatically be set to infinity; in manual focus mode, set focus to infinity manually.

3

Acquire Image Dust Off reference data.

Press the shutter-release button the rest of the way down to acquire Image Dust Off reference data.

If the reference object is too bright or too dark, the camera may be unable to acquire Image Dust Off reference data and the message shown at right will be displayed. Choose another reference object and repeat the process from step 1.

D

Image Dust Off Reference Data

The same reference data can be used for photographs taken with different lenses or at different apertures. Reference images can not be viewed using computer imaging software. A grid pattern is displayed when reference images are viewed on the camera.

280 B The Setup Menu: Camera Setup

Flicker Reduction

G button

➜ B setup menu

Reduce flicker and banding when shooting under fluorescent or

mercury-vapor lighting during live view ( 0 162) or movie

recording (

0 174). Choose Auto to allow the camera to

automatically choose the correct frequency, or manually match the frequency to that of the local AC power supply.

A

Flicker Reduction

If Auto fails to produce the desired results and you are unsure as to the frequency of the local power supply, test both the 50 and 60 Hz options and choose the one that produces the best results. Flicker reduction may not produce the desired results if the subject is very bright, in which case you should select mode A or M and choose a smaller aperture (higher f-number) before starting live view. Note that flicker reduction is not available when On is selected for Movie

settings > Manual movie settings ( 0 179) in mode M.

Slot Empty Release Lock

G button

➜ B setup menu

Selecting Enable release allows the shutter to be released when no memory card is inserted, although no pictures will be recorded (they will however be displayed in the monitor in demo mode). If Release locked is selected, the shutter-release button is only enabled when a memory card is inserted in the camera.

Video Mode

G button

➜ B setup menu

When connecting the camera to a television or VCR, be sure the camera video mode matches the device video standard (NTSC or

PAL).

B The Setup Menu: Camera Setup 281

Accessory Terminal

G button

➜ B setup menu

Choose the role of the optional accessory connected to the accessory terminal.

❚❚ Remote Control

Choose the functions performed using a remote cord or wireless

remote controller (

0 332).

Remote Shutter Release

Choose whether the shutter-release button on the optional accessory is used for photography or movie recording.

Option

y Take photos z Record movies

Description

The shutter-release button on the optional accessory is used to take photographs.

The shutter-release button on the optional accessory is used for movie recording. Press the button halfway to start live view or to focus in

AF-S

and AF-F modes. Press the button all the way down to start or end recording. Use the camera live view switch to end live view.

Assign Fn button

Choose the role played by the Fn buttons on wireless remote controllers.

Option

=

4

Same as camera

4 button a Live view

Description

The Fn button on the wireless remote controller performs the function currently assigned to the camera

A (L) button (0 267).

The Fn button on the wireless remote controller can be used to start and end live view.

282 B The Setup Menu: Camera Setup

❚❚ Location Data

This item is used to adjust settings for optional GP-1 or GP-1A

GPS units (

0 333). The unit can be connected to the camera’s

accessory terminal (

0 333) using the cable supplied with the

device, allowing information on the camera’s current position to be recorded when photographs are taken (turn the camera off before connecting the unit; for more information, see the manual provided with the device).

The Location data menu contains the options listed below.

• Standby timer: Choose whether or not the standby timer is enabled when the unit is attached.

Option

Enable

Disable

Description

Standby timer enabled. The timer expires automatically if no operations are performed for the time selected for

Custom Setting c2 (Auto off timers) > Standby timer

(

0 253; to allow the camera time to acquire location data,

the delay is extended by up to one minute after standby timer is activated or the camera is turned on). This reduces the drain on the battery. Note that the unit will remain active to acquire location data for a set period after the timer expires.

Standby timer disabled, ensuring uninterrupted recording of location data.

• Position: This item is only available if a GP-1 or GP-1A is connected, when it displays the current latitude, longitude, altitude, and Coordinated Universal Time (UTC) as reported by the unit.

• Set clock from satellite: Choose Yes to set the camera clock based on the time provided by the satellite navigation system.

A

Coordinated Universal Time (UTC)

UTC data is provided by the location data satellite system and is independent of the camera clock.

B The Setup Menu: Camera Setup 283

A

The Satellite Signal Indicator

Connection status is shown in the information display as follows:

% (static): Location data acquired.

% (flashing): The GP-1/GP-1A is searching for a signal. Pictures taken while the icon is flashing do not include location data.

• No icon: No new location data have been received from the GP-1/GP-1A for at least two seconds. Pictures taken when the

% icon is not displayed do not include location data.

Eye-Fi Upload

G button

➜ B setup menu

This option is displayed only when an Eye-Fi memory card

(available separately from third-party suppliers) is inserted in the camera. Choose Enable to upload photographs to a preselected destination. Note that pictures will not be uploaded if signal strength is insufficient.

Observe all local laws concerning wireless devices and choose

Disable where wireless devices are prohibited.

When an Eye-Fi card is inserted, its status is indicated by an icon in the information display:

d: Eye-Fi upload disabled.

e: Eye-Fi upload enabled but no pictures available for upload.

f (static): Eye-Fi upload enabled; waiting to begin upload.

f (animated): Eye-Fi upload enabled; uploading data.

g: Error.

284 B The Setup Menu: Camera Setup

D

Eye-Fi Cards

Eye-Fi cards may emit wireless signals when Disable is selected. If a

warning is displayed in the monitor (

0 359), turn the camera off and

remove the card.

Set Custom Setting c2 (Auto off timers) > Standby timer (

0 253) to

30 s or more when using an Eye-Fi card.

See the manual provided with the Eye-Fi card, and direct any inquiries to the manufacturer. The camera can be used to turn Eye-Fi cards on and off, but may not support other Eye-Fi functions.

Some cards may not be available in some countries or regions; consult the manufacturer for more information. Eye-Fi cards are for use only in the country of purchase. Be sure the Eye-Fi card firmware has been updated to the latest version.

Conformity Marking

G button

➜ B setup menu

View the standards with which the camera complies.

Firmware Version

G button

➜ B setup menu

View the current camera firmware version.

B The Setup Menu: Camera Setup 285

N The Retouch Menu: Creating Retouched Copies

To display the retouch menu, press G and select the N

(retouch menu) tab.

G button

Retouch Menu Options

The options in the retouch menu are used to create trimmed or retouched copies of existing pictures. The retouch menu is only displayed when a memory card containing photographs is inserted in the camera.

Option

0

0

NEF (RAW) processing

289

k

Trim

1 Resize i D-Lighting

2 Quick retouch j Red-eye correction e

Straighten

295

296

( Distortion control

296

r Perspective control

297

) Fisheye m

Filter effects

291

292

294

295

297

298

Option

l Monochrome o Image overlay q Color outline

U Photo illustration g Color sketch u Miniature effect

3 Selective color

)

Painting

f Edit movie p

Side-by-side comparison

*

307

* Available only if retouch menu is displayed by pressing P and selecting

Retouch in full-frame playback when a retouched image or original is displayed.

0

299

300

302

303

303

304

305

307

183

286 N The Retouch Menu: Creating Retouched Copies

A

Retouching Copies

Most options can be applied to copies created using other retouch options, although with the exceptions of Image overlay and Edit

movie > Choose start/end point, each option can be applied only once (note that multiple edits may result in loss of detail). Options that can not be applied to the current image are grayed out and unavailable.

A

Image Quality and Size

Except in the case of copies created with Trim and Resize, copies created from JPEG images are the same size as the original, while copies created from NEF (RAW) photos are saved as large fine-quality

JPEG images.

N The Retouch Menu: Creating Retouched Copies 287

Creating Retouched Copies

To create a retouched copy:

1

Display retouch options.

Highlight the desired item in the retouch menu and press

2.

2

Select a picture.

Highlight a picture and press

J (to view the highlighted picture full screen, press and hold the

X button).

A

Retouch

The camera may not be able to display or retouch images created with other devices. If the image was recorded at image quality

settings of NEF (RAW) + JPEG ( 0 90), retouch options apply only to

the RAW copy.

3

Select retouch options.

For more information, see the section for the selected item.

To exit without creating a retouched copy, press G.

288 N The Retouch Menu: Creating Retouched Copies

4

Create a retouched copy.

Press

J to create a retouched copy.

Except in the photo information

“image only” page ( 0 192),

retouched copies are indicated by a Z icon.

A

Creating Retouched Copies During Playback

To create a retouched copy of the picture currently displayed in fullframe playback (

0 188), press P, then highlight Retouch and press 2

and select a retouch option (Image overlay excluded).

NEF (RAW) Processing

G button

➜ N retouch menu

Create JPEG copies of NEF (RAW) photographs.

1

Select NEF (RAW) processing.

Highlight NEF (RAW) processing in the retouch menu and press 2 to display a picture selection dialog listing only NEF (RAW) images created with this camera.

2

Select a photograph.

Use the multi selector to highlight a photograph (to view the highlighted photograph full frame, press and hold the

X button). Press J to select the highlighted photograph and proceed to the next step.

N The Retouch Menu: Creating Retouched Copies 289

3

Choose settings for the JPEG copy.

Adjust the settings listed below. Note that white balance and vignette control are not available with pictures created with

image overlay ( 0 300), and that the effects of exposure

compensation may differ from those that might have been expected when the photograph was taken.

Image quality (

0 90)

Image size (

0 92)

White balance (

0 137)

Exposure compensation (

0 129)

Picture Control (

0 152)

High ISO NR (

0 244)

Color space (

0 243)

Vignette control (

0 244)

D-Lighting (

0 294)

4

Copy the photograph.

Highlight EXE and press J to create a

JPEG copy of the selected photograph. To exit without copying the photograph, press the G button.

290 N The Retouch Menu: Creating Retouched Copies

Trim

G button

➜ N retouch menu

Create a cropped copy of the selected photograph. The selected photograph is displayed with the selected crop shown in yellow; create a cropped copy as described in the following table.

To

Increase size of crop

Reduce size of crop

Use

X

W (Q)

Change crop aspect ratio

Description

Press the X button to increase the size of the crop.

Press the W (Q) button to reduce the size of the crop.

Rotate the command dial to choose the aspect ratio.

Move crop Use multi selector to position the crop.

Create copy Save the current crop as a separate file.

A

Image Size

The size of the copy (which varies with crop size and aspect ratio) appears at upper left in the crop display.

A

Viewing Cropped Copies

Playback zoom may not be available when cropped copies are displayed.

N The Retouch Menu: Creating Retouched Copies 291

Resize

G button

➜ N retouch menu

Create small copies of selected photographs.

1

Select Resize.

To resize selected images, highlight

Resize in the retouch menu and press

2.

2

Choose a size.

Highlight Choose size and press

2.

Highlight an option and press J.

292 N The Retouch Menu: Creating Retouched Copies

3

Choose pictures.

Highlight Select image and press

2.

Highlight pictures using the multi selector and press the

W (Q) button to select or deselect (to view the highlighted picture full screen, press and hold the X button). Selected pictures are marked by a

1 icon.

Press

J when the selection is complete.

W (Q) button

4

Save the resized copies.

A confirmation dialog will be displayed. Highlight Yes and press

J to save the resized copies.

A

Viewing Resized Copies

Playback zoom may not be available when resized copies are displayed.

N The Retouch Menu: Creating Retouched Copies 293

D-Lighting

G button

➜ N retouch menu

D-Lighting brightens shadows, making it ideal for dark or backlit photographs.

Before D-Lighting D-Lighting

(portrait subject)

Press 4 or 2 to choose the amount of correction performed; the effect can be previewed in the edit display. Press

J to copy the photograph.

❚❚ Portrait Subjects

If Portrait subjects is selected, the camera will apply D-Lighting only to human portrait subjects, brightening up to three such subjects while leaving the background untouched for an effect similar to that achieved with a reflector.

A

Portrait Subjects

The camera automatically selects up to three subjects for portrait

D-Lighting (note that portrait D-Lighting can not be applied to photos taken with Off selected for Auto image rotation in the playback

menu; 0 235). Depending on composition and how the subjects are

posed, the desired results may not be achieved; if you are not satisfied, remove the check from Portrait subjects.

294 N The Retouch Menu: Creating Retouched Copies

Quick Retouch

G button

➜ N retouch menu

Create copies with enhanced saturation and contrast. D-Lighting is applied as required to brighten dark or backlit subjects.

Press 4 or 2 to choose the amount of enhancement. Press J to copy the photograph.

Red-Eye Correction

G button

➜ N retouch menu

This option is used to correct “red-eye” caused by the flash, and is available only with photographs taken using the flash. The photograph selected for red-eye correction can be previewed in the edit display. Confirm the effects of red-eye correction and press J to create a copy. Note that red-eye correction may not always produce the expected results and may in very rare circumstances be applied to portions of the image that are not affected by red-eye; check the preview thoroughly before proceeding.

N The Retouch Menu: Creating Retouched Copies 295

Straighten

G button

➜ N retouch menu

Create a straightened copy of the selected image. Press 2 to rotate the image clockwise by up to five degrees in increments of approximately 0.25 degrees,

4 to rotate it counterclockwise

(note that edges of the image will be trimmed to create a rectangular copy). Press J to save the retouched copy.

Distortion Control

G button

➜ N retouch menu

Create copies with reduced peripheral distortion. Select Auto to let the camera correct distortion automatically and then make fine adjustments using the multi selector, or select Manual to reduce distortion manually (note that Auto is not available with photos taken using auto distortion control;

see page 245).

Press 2 to reduce barrel distortion, 4 to reduce pin-cushion distortion (note that greater amounts of distortion control result in more of the edges being cropped out). Press J to save the retouched copy.

D

Auto

Auto is for use only with pictures taken with type G, E, and D lenses

(PC, fisheye, and certain other lenses excluded); results are not guaranteed with other lenses.

296 N The Retouch Menu: Creating Retouched Copies

Perspective Control

G button

➜ N retouch menu

Create copies that reduce the effects of perspective taken from the base of a tall object. Use the multi selector to adjust perspective (note that greater amounts of perspective control result in more of the edges being cropped out). Press J to save the retouched copy.

Before After

Fisheye

G button

➜ N retouch menu

Create copies that appear to have been taken with a fisheye lens. Press

2 to increase the effect (this also increases the amount that will be cropped out at the edges of the image), 4 to reduce it. Press

J to save the retouched copy.

N The Retouch Menu: Creating Retouched Copies 297

Filter Effects

G button

➜ N retouch menu

After adjusting filter effects as described below, press J to copy the photograph.

Option

Skylight

Warm filter

Cross screen

Description

Creates the effect of a skylight filter, making the picture less blue.

Creates a copy with warm tone filter effects, giving the copy a “warm” red cast.

Add starburst effects to light sources.

• Number of points: Choose from four, six, or eight.

• Filter amount: Choose the brightness of the light sources affected.

• Filter angle: Choose the angle of the points.

• Length of points: Choose the length of points.

• Confirm: Preview the effects of the filter. Press X to preview the copy full frame.

• Save: Create a retouched copy.

Soft

Add a soft filter effect. Press

4 or 2 to choose the filter strength.

298 N The Retouch Menu: Creating Retouched Copies

Monochrome

G button

➜ N retouch menu

Copy photographs in Black-and-white,

Sepia, or Cyanotype (blue and white monochrome).

Selecting Sepia or Cyanotype displays a preview of the selected image; press 1 to increase color saturation, 3 to decrease. Press

J to create a monochrome copy.

Increase saturation

Decrease saturation

N The Retouch Menu: Creating Retouched Copies 299

Image Overlay

G button

➜ N retouch menu

Image overlay combines two existing NEF (RAW) photographs to create a single picture that is saved separately from the originals; the results, which make use of RAW data from the camera image sensor, are noticeably better than overlays created in an imaging application. The new picture is saved at current image quality and size settings; before creating an overlay, set image quality and size (

0 90, 92; all options are available). To create an NEF

(RAW) copy, choose an image quality of NEF (RAW).

+

1

Select Image overlay.

Highlight Image overlay in the retouch menu and press 2.

The dialog shown at right will be displayed, with Image 1 highlighted; press J to display a list of the NEF

(RAW) pictures created with this camera.

300 N The Retouch Menu: Creating Retouched Copies

2

Select the first image.

Use the multi selector to highlight the first photograph in the overlay. To view the highlighted photograph full frame, press and hold the X button.

Press

J to select the highlighted photograph and return to the preview display.

3

Select the second image.

The selected image will appear as Image 1. Highlight

Image 2 and press J, then select the second photo as described in Step 2.

4

Adjust gain.

Highlight Image 1 or Image 2 and optimize exposure for the overlay by pressing

1 or 3 to select gain from values between 0.1 and 2.0. Repeat for the second image. The default value is 1.0; select 0.5 to halve gain or 2.0 to double it. The effects of gain are visible in the Preview column.

5

Preview the overlay.

To preview the composition as shown at right, press 4 or 2 to place the cursor in the Preview column, then press 1 or 3 to highlight Overlay and press

J (note that colors and brightness in the preview may differ from the final image). To save the overlay without displaying a preview, select Save. To return to Step 4 and select new photos or adjust gain, press

W (Q).

N The Retouch Menu: Creating Retouched Copies 301

6

Save the overlay.

Press

J while the preview is displayed to save the overlay. After an overlay is created, the resulting image will be displayed full-frame in the monitor.

D

Image Overlay

Only NEF (RAW) photographs with the same bit depth can be

combined ( 0 240). The overlay has the same photo info as the

photograph selected for Image 1. The current image comment is appended to the overlay when it is saved; copyright information, however, is not copied.

Color Outline

G button

➜ N retouch menu

Create an outline copy of a photograph to use as a base for painting. Press

J to save the retouched copy.

Before After

302 N The Retouch Menu: Creating Retouched Copies

Photo Illustration

G button

➜ N retouch menu

Sharpen outlines and simplify coloring for a poster effect. Press 2 or 4 to make outlines thicker or thinner. Press

J to save the retouched copy.

Before After

Color Sketch

G button

➜ N retouch menu

Create a copy of a photograph that resembles a sketch made with colored pencils. Press

1 or 3 to highlight

Vividness or Outlines and press

4 or 2 to change. Vividness can be increased to make colors more saturated, or decreased for a washed-out, monochromatic effect, while outlines can be made thicker or thinner. Thicker outlines make colors more saturated. Press

J to save the retouched copy.

N The Retouch Menu: Creating Retouched Copies 303

Miniature Effect

G button

➜ N retouch menu

Create a copy that appears to be a photo of a diorama. Works best with photos taken from a high vantage point. The area that will be in focus in the copy is indicated by a yellow frame.

To

Choose orientation

Choose area in focus

Press

W (Q)

Description

Press

W (Q) to choose orientation of area that is in focus.

If area of effect is in wide orientation, press

1 or 3 to position frame showing area of copy that will be in focus.

Area in focus

If area of effect is in tall orientation, press 4 or

2 to position frame showing area of copy that will be in focus.

Choose size

If area of effect is in wide orientation, press 4 or

2 to choose height.

If area of effect is in tall orientation, press

1 or

3 to choose width.

Create copy Create copy.

304 N The Retouch Menu: Creating Retouched Copies

Selective Color

G button

➜ N retouch menu

Create a copy in which only selected hues appear in color.

1

Select Selective color.

Highlight Selective color in the retouch menu and press

2.

2

Select a photograph.

Highlight a photograph and press

J

(to view the highlighted photograph full frame, press and hold the X button).

3

Select a color.

Use the multi selector to position the cursor over an object and press

A

( L) to select the color of the object as one that will remain in the final copy (the camera may have difficulty detecting unsaturated colors; choose a saturated color). To zoom in on the picture for precise color selection, press X. Press W (Q) to zoom out.

A (L) button

Selected color

N The Retouch Menu: Creating Retouched Copies 305

4

Highlight the color range.

Rotate the command dial to highlight the color range for the selected color.

Color range

5

Choose the color range.

Press 1 or 3 to increase or decrease the range of similar hues that will be included in the final photograph.

Choose from values between 1 and 7; note that higher values may include hues from other colors.

6

Select additional colors.

To select additional colors, rotate the command dial to highlight another of the three color boxes at the top of the display and repeat

Steps 3–5 to select another color. Repeat for a third color if desired. To deselect the highlighted color, press

O (To remove all colors, press and hold

O. A confirmation dialog will be displayed; select Yes).

7

Save the edited copy.

Press J to copy the photograph.

306 N The Retouch Menu: Creating Retouched Copies

Painting

G button

➜ N retouch menu

Create a copy which emphasizes detail and color for a painterly effect. Press J to save the retouched copy.

Before After

Side-by-side Comparison

Compare retouched copies to the original photographs. This option is only available if the retouch menu is displayed by pressing the

P button and selecting Retouch when a copy or original is played back full frame.

1

Select a picture.

Select a retouched copy (shown by a

N icon) or a photograph that has been retouched in full-frame playback. Press

P, then highlight

Retouch and press 2.

P button

N The Retouch Menu: Creating Retouched Copies 307

2

Select Side-by-side comparison.

Highlight Side-by-side comparison in the retouch menu and press J.

3

Compare the copy with the original.

The source image is displayed on the

Options used to create copy

left, the retouched copy on the right, with the options used to create the copy listed at the top of the display.

Press

4 or 2 to switch between the source image and the retouched copy.

To view the highlighted picture full frame, press and hold the X button. If the copy was created from two

Source image

Retouched copy

images using Image overlay, press

1 or

3 to view the other source image. If multiple copies exist for the current source image, press 1 or 3 to view the other copies. Press J to return to playback with the highlighted image displayed.

D

Side-by-side comparison

The source image will not be displayed if the copy was created from a photograph that has since been deleted or that was protected when

the copy was made (

0 202).

308 N The Retouch Menu: Creating Retouched Copies

m Recent Settings/O My Menu

Both recent settings, a menu listing the 20 most recently used settings, and My Menu, a custom menu listing up to 20 userselected options, can be accessed by pressing the

G button highlighting the last tab in the menu list (either m or O).

G button

Choosing a Menu

Use the Choose tab option to choose the menu displayed.

1

Select Choose tab.

Highlight Choose tab and press 2.

2

Select a menu.

Highlight O MY MENU or m RECENT

SETTINGS and press J to display the selected menu.

m Recent Settings/O My Menu 309

m Recent Settings

When m RECENT SETTINGS is selected for Choose tab, the menu lists the 20 most recently used settings, with the most recently-used items first. Press

1 or

3 to highlight an option and press 2 to select.

A

Removing Items from the Recent Settings Menu

To remove an item from the recent settings menu, highlight it and press the O button. A confirmation dialog will be displayed; press O again to delete the selected item.

O My Menu

Selecting

O MY MENU for Choose tab lets you access a customized menu of up to 20 options selected from the playback, shooting, Custom Settings, setup, and retouch menus.

Follow the steps below to add items to, delete items from, and reorder items in My Menu.

❚❚ Adding Options to My Menu

1

Select Add items.

Highlight Add items and press 2.

2

Select a menu.

Highlight the name of the menu containing the option you wish to add and press

2.

310 m Recent Settings/O My Menu

3

Select an item.

Highlight the desired menu item and press J.

4

Position the new item.

Press

1 or 3 to move the new item up or down in My Menu. Press J to add the new item. Repeat steps 1–4 to select additional items.

A

Adding Options to My Menu

The items currently displayed in My Menu are indicated by a check mark. Items indicated by a V icon can not be selected.

m Recent Settings/O My Menu 311

❚❚ Deleting Options from My Menu

1

Select Remove items.

Highlight Remove items and press

2.

2

Select items.

Highlight items and press 2 to select or deselect. Selected items are indicated by a check mark.

3

Delete the selected items.

Press J. A confirmation dialog will be displayed; press J again to delete the selected items.

312 m Recent Settings/O My Menu

❚❚ Reordering Options in My Menu

1

Select Rank items.

Highlight Rank items and press

2.

2

Select an item.

Highlight the item you wish to move and press J.

3

Position the item.

Press 1 or 3 to move the item up or down in My Menu and press J.

Repeat Steps 2–3 to reposition additional items.

4

Exit to My Menu.

Press the G button to return to My

Menu.

G button m Recent Settings/O My Menu 313

Technical Notes

Read this chapter for information on compatible accessories, cleaning and storing the camera, and what to do if an error message is displayed or you encounter problems using the camera.

Compatible Lenses

Compatible CPU Lenses

This camera supports autofocus with AF-S, AF-P, and AF-I CPU lenses only. AF-S lenses have names beginning with AF-S, AF-P lenses with AF-P, and AF-I lenses with AF-I. Autofocus is not supported with other autofocus (AF) lenses. The following table lists the features available with compatible lenses in viewfinder photography:

Camera setting

Lens/accessory

AF-S, AF-P, AF-I NIKKOR

AF

z

Other type G or D AF NIKKOR —

PC-E NIKKOR series

2, 3

PC Micro 85mm f/2.8D

5

AF-S/AF-I teleconverter

— z 6

Focus mode

MF (with electronic Other

L

M

N

rangefinder) MF M

z z z

modes

z

3D Color

z

— z

1 z z z 4 z

4

6 z z z z z

— z

1 z

Shooting mode

z z z

Metering system

z z

— z z z z z z

— z 1

Other AF NIKKOR (except lenses for F3AF)

— z 7 z z z

✔ z

AI-P NIKKOR — z 8 z z z

✔ z 1

1 Spot metering meters selected focus point (

0 125).

1

2 The tilt knob for the PC-E NIKKOR 24mm f/3.5D ED may contact the camera body when the lens is revolved.

1

1

314 Technical Notes

3 Shifting and/or tilting the lens interferes with exposure.

4 Can not be used with shifting or tilting.

5 Optimal exposure will only be achieved if the lens is at maximum aperture and the lens is not shifted or tilted.

6 With maximum effective aperture of f/5.6 or faster.

7 When AF 80–200mm f/2.8, AF 35–70mm f/2.8, AF 28–85mm f/3.5–4.5 (New), or

AF 28–85mm f/3.5–4.5 lenses are zoomed all the way in at the minimum focus distance, the in-focus indicator (

I) may be displayed when the image on the matte screen in the viewfinder is not in focus. Before shooting, confirm that the image in the viewfinder screen is in focus.

8 With maximum aperture of f/5.6 or faster.

Noise in the form of lines may appear during autofocus when movies are recorded at high ISO sensitivities. Use manual focus or focus lock.

D

IX NIKKOR Lenses

IX NIKKOR lenses can not be used.

A

Identifying CPU and Type G, E, and D Lenses

CPU lenses can be identified by the presence of CPU contacts, type G,

E, and D lenses by a letter on the lens barrel. Type G and E lenses are not equipped with a lens aperture ring.

CPU contacts Aperture ring

CPU lens Type G or E lens Type D lens

When using a CPU lens equipped with an aperture ring, lock the aperture ring at the minimum aperture (highest f-number).

A

Matrix Metering

For matrix metering, the camera uses a 2016-pixel RGB sensor to set exposure according to tone distribution, color, composition, and, with type G, E, or D lenses, distance information (3D color matrix metering

II; with other CPU lenses, the camera uses color matrix metering II; which does not include 3D distance information).

Technical Notes

315

Compatible Non-CPU Lenses

Non-CPU lenses may only be used when the camera is in mode

M

. Selecting another mode disables the shutter release.

Aperture must be adjusted manually via the lens aperture ring and the camera metering system, i-TTL flash control, and other features requiring a CPU lens can not be used. Some non-CPU lenses can not be used; see “Incompatible Accessories and

Non-CPU Lenses,” below.

Camera setting Focus mode

MF (with electronic rangefinder)

Shooting mode

Lens/accessory

AI-, AI-modified NIKKOR or Nikon

Series E lenses

Medical NIKKOR 120mm f/4

Reflex NIKKOR

PC NIKKOR

AI-type Teleconverter

AF

— z z

— z z

1

4

5

MF

z z z z z

M

z z z z z

2

2, 3

2

2

2

PB-6 Bellows Focusing

Attachment

6

Auto extension rings (PK-series

11A, 12, or 13; PN-11)

— z z

1

1 z z z z

2

2

1 With maximum aperture of f/5.6 or faster.

2 Exposure indicator can not be used.

3 Can be used at shutter speeds slower than flash sync speed by one step or more.

4 Can not be used with shifting or tilting.

5 With maximum effective aperture of f/5.6 or faster.

6 Attach in vertical orientation (can be used in horizontal orientation once attached).

Other modes

316 Technical Notes

D

Incompatible Accessories and Non-CPU Lenses

The following accessories and non-CPU lenses can

NOT

be used with the D5500:

TC-16A AF teleconverter

Non-AI lenses

Lenses that require the AU-1 focusing unit (400mm f/4.5,

600mm f/5.6, 800mm f/8, 1200mm f/11)

Fisheye (6mm f/5.6, 7.5mm f/5.6, 8mm f/8, OP 10mm f/5.6)

2.1cm f/4

Extension Ring K2

180–600mm f/8 ED (serial numbers 174041–174180)

360–1200mm f/11 ED (serial numbers 174031–174127)

200–600mm f/9.5 (serial numbers 280001–300490)

AF lenses for the F3AF (AF 80mm f/2.8, AF 200mm f/3.5 ED,

AF Teleconverter TC-16)

PC 28mm f/4 (serial number 180900 or earlier)

PC 35mm f/2.8 (serial numbers 851001–906200)

PC 35mm f/3.5 (old type)

Reflex 1000mm f/6.3 (old type)

Reflex 1000mm f/11 (serial numbers 142361–143000)

Reflex 2000mm f/11 (serial numbers 200111–200310)

Technical Notes

317

D

AF-Assist Illumination

The AF-assist illuminator has a range of about 0.5–3.0 m (1 ft 8 in.–9 ft

10 in.); when using the illuminator, use a lens with a focal length of

18–200 mm and remove the lens hood. AF-assist illumination is not available with the following lenses:

AF-S NIKKOR 14–24mm f/2.8G ED

AF-S NIKKOR 28–300mm f/3.5–5.6G ED VR

AF-S DX NIKKOR 55–300mm f/4.5–5.6G ED VR

AF-S VR Zoom-Nikkor 70–200mm f/2.8G IF-ED

AF-S NIKKOR 70–200mm f/2.8G ED VR II

AF-S Zoom-Nikkor 80–200mm f/2.8D IF-ED

AF-S NIKKOR 80–400mm f/4.5–5.6G ED VR

AF-S VR Nikkor 200mm f/2G IF-ED

AF-S NIKKOR 200mm f/2G ED VR II

AF-S VR Zoom-Nikkor 200–400mm f/4G IF-ED

AF-S NIKKOR 200–400mm f/4G ED VR II

318 Technical Notes

At ranges under 1 m (3 ft 3 in.), the following lenses may block the

AF-assist illuminator and interfere with autofocus when lighting is poor:

AF-S DX NIKKOR 10–24mm f/3.5–4.5G ED

AF-S NIKKOR 16–35mm f/4G ED VR

AF-S Zoom-Nikkor 17–35mm f/2.8D IF-ED

AF-S DX Zoom-Nikkor 17–55mm f/2.8G IF-ED

AF-S NIKKOR 18–35mm f/3.5–4.5G ED

AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–105mm f/3.5–5.6G ED VR

AF-S DX VR Zoom-Nikkor 18–200mm f/3.5–5.6G IF-ED

AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–200mm f/3.5–5.6G ED VR II

AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–300mm f/3.5–5.6G ED VR

AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–300mm f/3.5–6.3G ED VR

AF-S NIKKOR 20mm f/1.8G ED

AF-S NIKKOR 24–70mm f/2.8G ED

AF-S VR Zoom-Nikkor 24–120mm f/3.5–5.6G IF-ED

AF-S NIKKOR 24–120mm f/4G ED VR

AF-S NIKKOR 28mm f/1.8G

AF-S Zoom-Nikkor 28–70mm f/2.8D IF-ED

AF-S NIKKOR 35mm f/1.4G

AF-S NIKKOR 70–200mm f/4G ED

AF-S NIKKOR 70–200mm f/4G ED VR

AF-S NIKKOR 85mm f/1.4G

AF-S NIKKOR 85mm f/1.8G

AF-S VR Micro-Nikkor 105mm f/2.8G IF-ED

Technical Notes

319

D

The Built-in Flash

The built-in flash can be used with lenses with focal lengths of

18–300 mm, although in some cases the flash may be unable to entirely light the subject at some ranges or focal lengths due to shadows cast by the lens (see the illustration below), while lenses that block the subject’s view of the red-eye reduction lamp may interfere with red-eye reduction. Remove lens hoods to prevent shadows.

Shadow Vignetting

The flash has a minimum range of 0.6 m and can not be used in the macro range of macro zoom lenses. The flash may be unable to light the entire subject with the following lenses at ranges less than those given below:

Lens

AF-S DX NIKKOR 10–24mm f/3.5–4.5G ED

AF-S DX Zoom-Nikkor 12–24mm f/4G IF-ED

AF-S NIKKOR 16–35mm f/4G ED VR

AF-S DX NIKKOR 16–85mm f/3.5–5.6G ED VR

AF-S Zoom-Nikkor 17–35mm f/2.8D IF-ED

AF-S DX Zoom-Nikkor 17–55mm f/2.8G IF-ED

AF-S NIKKOR 18–35mm f/3.5–4.5G ED

AF Zoom-Nikkor 18–35mm f/3.5–4.5D IF-ED

Zoom position

24 mm

24 mm

35 mm

24–85 mm

28 mm

35 mm

28 mm

35 mm

45–55 mm

24 mm

28 mm

35 mm

24 mm

28–35 mm

Minimum distance without vignetting

1.5 m/ 4 ft 12 in.

1.0 m/ 3 ft 4 in.

1.0 m/ 3 ft 4 in.

No vignetting

1.0 m/ 3 ft 4 in.

No vignetting

1.5 m/ 4 ft 12 in.

1.0 m/ 3 ft 4 in.

No vignetting

1.5 m/ 4 ft 12 in.

1.0 m/ 3 ft 4 in.

No vignetting

1.0 m/ 3 ft 4 in.

No vignetting

320 Technical Notes

Lens

AF-P DX NIKKOR 18–55mm f/3.5–5.6G VR,

AF-P DX NIKKOR 18–55mm f/3.5–5.6G

AF-S DX Zoom-Nikkor 18–70mm f/3.5–4.5G IF-ED

AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–105mm f/3.5–5.6G ED VR

AF-S DX Zoom-Nikkor 18–135mm f/3.5–5.6G IF-ED

AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–140mm f/3.5–5.6G ED VR

AF-S DX VR Zoom-Nikkor 18–200mm f/3.5–5.6G IF-ED,

AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–200mm f/3.5–5.6G ED VR II

AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–300mm f/3.5–5.6G ED VR

AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–300mm f/3.5–6.3G ED VR

AF-S NIKKOR 20mm f/1.8G ED

AF Zoom-Nikkor 20–35mm f/2.8D IF

AF-S NIKKOR 24mm f/1.4G ED

AF-S NIKKOR 24–70mm f/2.8G ED

AF-S VR Zoom-Nikkor 24–120mm f/3.5–5.6G IF-ED

AF-S NIKKOR 24–120mm f/4G ED VR

AF-S Zoom-Nikkor 28–70mm f/2.8D IF-ED

AF-S NIKKOR 28–300mm f/3.5–5.6G ED VR

20 mm

24 mm

28 mm

35 mm

24 mm

35 mm

50–70 mm

24 mm

28–120 mm

24 mm

28–120 mm

35 mm

50–70 mm

28 mm

35 mm

50–300 mm

Zoom position

18 mm

24–55 mm

18 mm

24–70 mm

18 mm

Minimum distance without vignetting

1.0 m/ 3 ft 4 in.

No vignetting

1.0 m/ 3 ft 4 in.

No vignetting

2.5 m/ 8 ft 3 in.

24 mm

35–105 mm

18 mm

24–135 mm

24 mm

1.0 m/ 3 ft 4 in.

No vignetting

2.0 m/ 6 ft 7 in.

No vignetting

1.0 m/ 3 ft 4 in.

35–140 mm

24 mm

No vignetting

1.0 m/ 3 ft 4 in.

35–200 mm No vignetting

35–300 mm 1.0 m/ 3 ft 4 in.

35–300 mm No vignetting

1.5 m/ 4 ft 12 in.

2.5 m/ 8 ft 3 in.

1.0 m/ 3 ft 4 in.

No vignetting

1.0 m/ 3 ft 4 in.

1.5 m/ 4 ft 12 in.

No vignetting

1.0 m/ 3 ft 4 in.

No vignetting

1.5 m/ 4 ft 12 in.

No vignetting

1.5 m/ 4 ft 12 in.

No vignetting

1.5 m/ 4 ft 12 in.

1.0 m/ 3 ft 4 in.

No vignetting

Technical Notes

321

Lens

AF-S VR Zoom-Nikkor 200–400mm f/4G IF-ED,

AF-S NIKKOR 200–400mm f/4G ED VR II

Zoom position

200 mm

250 mm

300 mm

24 mm

Minimum distance without vignetting

4.0 m/13 ft 2 in.

3.0 m/ 9 ft 11 in.

2.5 m/ 8 ft 3 in.

3.0 m/ 9 ft 11 in.

PC-E NIKKOR 24mm f/3.5D ED

*

* When not shifted or tilted.

When used with the AF-S NIKKOR 14–24mm f/2.8G ED, the flash will be unable to light the entire subject at all ranges.

A

Calculating Angle of View

The size of the area exposed by a 35mm camera is 36 × 24 mm. The size of the area exposed by the D5500, in contrast, is 23.5 × 15.6 mm, meaning that the angle of view of a 35mm camera is approximately 1.5 times that of the D5500. The approximate focal length of lenses for the

D5500 in 35mm format can be calculated by multiplying the focal length of the lens by about 1.5.

Picture size (35mm format)

(36 × 24 mm)

Picture diagonal

Lens

Picture size (D5500)

(23.5 × 15.6 mm)

Angle of view (35mm format)

Angle of view (D5500)

322 Technical Notes

Optional Flash Units (Speedlights)

The camera supports the Nikon Creative Lighting System (CLS) and can be used with CLS-compatible flash units. The built-in flash will not fire when an optional flash unit is attached.

Flash Units Compatible with the Creative

Lighting System (CLS)

The camera can be used with the following CLS-compatible flash units:

Flash unit

Feature

Guide No. (ISO 100)

5

34/111 38/125 28/92 30/98 24/78 21/69 18/59 10/33

1 If a color filter is attached to the SB-910, SB-900, or SB-700 when AUTO or

N (flash) is selected for white balance, the camera will automatically detect the filter and adjust white balance appropriately.

2 Users of the LED light can set camera white balance to v or N for optimal results.

3 Wireless flash control is not available.

4 Controlled remotely using optional SB-910, SB-900, SB-800, SB-700, or SB-500 flash unit or

SU-800 wireless Speedlight commander.

5 m/ft, 20 °C (68 °F), SB-910, SB-900, SB-800, SB-700, and SB-600 at 35 mm zoom head position; SB-910, SB-900, and SB-700 with standard illumination.

• The SU-800 wireless speedlight commander: When mounted on a

CLS-compatible camera, the SU-800 can be used as a commander for remote SB-910, SB-900, SB-800, SB-700,

SB-600, SB-500, or SB-R200 flash units in up to three groups.

The SU-800 itself is not equipped with a flash.

A

The Nikon Creative Lighting System (CLS)

Nikon’s advanced Creative Lighting System (CLS) offers improved communication between the camera and compatible flash units for improved flash photography. Refer to the documentation provided with the flash unit for details.

Technical Notes

323

A

Guide Number

To calculate the range of the flash at full power, divide the Guide

Number by the aperture. If, for example, the flash unit has a Guide

Number of 34 m or 111 ft (ISO 100, 20 °C/68 °F); its range at an aperture of f/5.6 is 34÷5.6 or about 6.1 meters (or in feet,

111÷5.6=approximately 19 ft 10 in.). For each twofold increase in ISO sensitivity, multiply the Guide Number by the square root of two

(approximately 1.4).

324 Technical Notes

The following features are available with CLS-compatible flash units:

i-TTL i-TTL balanced fill-flash for digital SLR

1

Standard i-TTL fill-flash for digital SLR

z z

2 z z z — — z z z z

2 z — — z z

AA Auto aperture

A Non-TTL auto

GN Distance-priority manual

M Manual

z

3

— — — — — — — z

3

— — — — — — — z z — — — — — — z z z z

4

— — z

4 z

4

RPT Repeating flash

Remote flash control

z

— — — — — — — z z — z

4 z — — —

i-TTL i-TTL

z z — z

4

— — — —

[A:B] Quick wireless flash control

— z — — z

5

— — —

AA Auto aperture

z

6

— — — — — — —

A Non-TTL auto

M Manual

z

— — — — — — — z z — z

4

— — — —

RPT Repeating flash i-TTL i-TTL

z

— — — — — — — z z z z — z — —

[A:B] Quick wireless flash control

z z z z — z — —

AA Auto aperture

A Non-TTL auto

M Manual

z

6

— — — — — — — z

— — — — — — — z z z z — z — —

RPT Repeating flash

z z z z — — — —

Technical Notes

325

Color Information Communication (flash)

Camera flash mode selection

Camera flash unit firmware update z z z z — — z z

Color Information Communication (LED light) — — — z — — — —

AF-assist for multi-area AF z z z — z

7

— — —

Red-eye reduction z z z z — — z —

— — — z — — z z z

8 z — z — — — z

1 Not available with spot metering.

2 Can also be selected with flash unit.

3 AA/A mode selection performed on flash unit using custom settings. “A” will be selected when a non-CPU lens is used.

4

Can only be selected with camera ( 0 259).

5 Available only during close-up photography.

6 Non-TTL auto (A) is used with non-CPU lenses, regardless of mode selected with flash unit.

7 Available only in commander mode.

8 Firmware updates for the SB-910 and SB-900 can be performed from the camera.

326 Technical Notes

❚❚ Other Flash Units

The following flash units can be used in non-TTL auto and manual modes. Use with the camera in exposure mode S or M and a shutter speed of

1

/

200

s or slower selected.

Flash mode

A

M

Non-TTL auto

Manual

Flash unit SB-80DX,

G

Repeating flash

REAR Rear-curtain sync

4

SB-28DX,

SB-28, SB-26,

SB-25, SB-24 SB-50DX

1

z z

— z z z

— z

SB-30, SB-27

2

,

SB-22S, SB-22,

SB-20, SB-16B,

SB-15

z z

— z

SB-23,

SB-29

SB-21B

SB-29S

— z

— z

3

,

3

,

3

1 Select mode P, S, A, or M, lower built-in flash, and use optional flash unit only.

2 Flash mode is automatically set to TTL and shutter-release is disabled. Set flash unit to A

(non-TTL auto flash).

3 Autofocus is available with AF-S VR Micro-Nikkor 105mm f/2.8G IF-ED and AF-S Micro NIKKOR

60mm f/2.8G ED lenses only.

4 Available when camera is used to select flash mode.

A

The AS-15 Sync Terminal Adapter

When the AS-15 sync terminal adapter (available separately) is mounted on the camera accessory shoe, flash accessories can be connected via a sync cable.

D

Use Only Nikon Flash Accessories

Use only Nikon flash units. Negative voltages or voltages over 250 V applied to the accessory shoe could not only prevent normal operation, but damage the sync circuitry of the camera or flash. Before using a Nikon flash unit not listed in this section, contact a Nikonauthorized service representative for more information.

Technical Notes

327

D

Notes on Optional Flash Units

Refer to the Speedlight manual for detailed instructions. If the flash unit supports CLS, refer to the section on CLS-compatible digital SLR cameras. The D5500 is not included in the “digital SLR” category in the

SB-80DX, SB-28DX, and SB-50DX manuals.

If an optional flash unit is attached in shooting modes other than j, %, and

3, the flash will fire with every shot, even in modes in which the built-in flash can not be used.

i-TTL flash control can be used at ISO sensitivities between 100 and

12800. At high ISO sensitivities, noise (lines) may appear in photos taken with some optional flash units; if this occurs, choose a lower value. At values over 12800, the desired results may not be achieved at some ranges or aperture settings. If the flash-ready indicator flashes for about three seconds after a photograph is taken, the flash has fired at full power and the photograph may be underexposed (CLScompatible flash units only; for information on the exposure and flash charge indicators on other units, see the manual provided with the flash).

When an SC-series 17, 28, or 29 sync cable is used for off-camera flash photography, correct exposure may not be achieved in i-TTL mode.

We recommend that you choose spot metering to select standard i-TTL flash control. Take a test shot and view the results in the monitor.

In i-TTL, use the flash panel or bounce adapter provided with the flash unit. Do not use other panels such as diffusion panels, as this may produce incorrect exposure.

If the controls on the optional SB-910, SB-900, SB-800, SB-700 or

SB-600 flash unit or SU-800 wireless Speedlight commander are used to set flash compensation,

Y will appear in the information display.

328 Technical Notes

The SB-910, SB-900, SB-800, SB-700, SB-600, SB-500, and SB-400 provide red-eye reduction, while the SB-910, SB-900, SB-800, SB-700,

SB-600, and SU-800 provide AF-assist illumination with the following restrictions:

• SB-910 and SB-900: AF-assist illumination is available with

17–135 mm AF lenses, however, autofocus is available only with the focus points shown at right.

17–19 mm

20–105 mm

106–135 mm

• SB-800, SB-600, and SU-800: AF-assist illumination is available with

24–105 mm AF lenses, however, autofocus is available only with the focus points shown at right.

24–34 mm

35–49 mm

50–105 mm

• SB-700: AF-assist illumination is available with 24–135 mm AF lenses, however, autofocus is available only with the focus points shown at right.

24–135 mm

Depending on the lens used and scene recorded, the in-focus indicator

( I) may be displayed when the subject is not in focus, or the camera may be unable to focus and the shutter release will be disabled.

Technical Notes

329

Other Accessories

At the time of writing, the following accessories were available for the D5500.

Power sources

• Rechargeable Li-ion Battery EN-EL14a (

0 27): Additional

EN-EL14a batteries are available from local retailers and

Nikon-authorized service representatives. EN-EL14 batteries can also be used.

• Battery Charger MH-24 (

0 27): Recharge EN-EL14a and

EN-EL14 batteries.

• Power Connector EP-5A, AC Adapter EH-5b: These accessories can be used to power the camera for extended periods

(EH-5a and EH-5 AC adapters can also be used). A power connector EP-5A is required to connect the camera to

the EH-5b, EH-5a, or EH-5; see page 335 for details.

Accessory shoe covers

Accessory Shoe Cover BS-1

: A cover protecting the accessory shoe. The accessory shoe is used for optional flash units.

Filters

Filters intended for special-effects photography may interfere with autofocus or the electronic rangefinder.

The D5500 can not be used with linear polarizing filters.

Use C-PL or C-PL II circular polarizing filters instead.

NC filters are recommended for protecting the lens.

To prevent ghosting, use of a filter is not recommended when the subject is framed against a bright light, or when a bright light source is in the frame.

Center-weighted metering is recommended with filters with exposure factors (filter factors) over 1× (Y44, Y48,

Y52, O56, R60, X0, X1, C-PL, ND2S, ND4, ND4S, ND8,

ND8S, ND400, A2, A12, B2, B8, B12). See the filter manual for details.

330 Technical Notes

Viewfinder eyepiece accessories

• DK-5 Eyepiece Cap (

0 76): Prevents light entering via the

viewfinder from appearing in the photograph or interfering with exposure.

• DK-20C Eyepiece Correction Lenses: Lenses are available with diopters of –5, –4, –3, –2, 0, +0.5, +1, +2, and +3 m

–1 when the camera diopter adjustment control is in the neutral position (–1 m

–1

). Use eyepiece correction lenses only if the desired focus can not be achieved with the built in diopter adjustment control (–1.7 to

+0.5 m

–1

). Test eyepiece correction lenses before purchase to ensure that the desired focus can be achieved. The rubber eyecup can not be used with eyepiece correction lenses.

• Magnifier DG-2: The DG-2 magnifies the scene displayed in the center of the viewfinder for greater precision during focusing. Eyepiece adapter required (available separately). Note that because the DG-2 interferes with the eye sensor, you may find it necessary to select Off for the Info display auto off item in the setup menu

( 0 278) when this accessory is attached.

• Eyepiece Adapter DK-22: The DK-22 is used when attaching the DG-2 magnifier. The monitor can not be rotated with the adapter in place.

• Right-Angle Viewing Attachment DR-6: The DR-6 attaches at a right angle to the viewfinder eyepiece, allowing the image in the viewfinder to be viewed at right angles to the lens (for example, from directly above when the camera is horizontal). The monitor can not be rotated with the attachment in place. In addition, because the

DR-6 interferes with the eye sensor, you may find it necessary to select Off for the Info display auto off item in the setup menu when this accessory is attached.

Technical Notes

331

Software

Body cap

Remote controls/ wireless remote controller

Camera Control Pro 2

: Control the camera remotely from a computer to record movies and photographs and save photographs directly to the computer hard disk.

Note

: Use the latest versions of Nikon software; see the

websites listed on page xix for the latest information on

supported operating systems. At default settings, Nikon

Message Center 2 will periodically check for updates to

Nikon software and firmware while you are logged in to an account on the computer and the computer is connected to the Internet. A message is automatically displayed when an update is found.

Body Cap BF-1B/Body Cap BF-1A

: The body cap keeps the mirror, viewfinder screen, and image sensor free of dust when a lens is not in place.

• Wireless Remote Control ML-L3 (

0 107): The ML-L3 uses a 3 V

CR2025 battery.

332 Technical Notes

Pressing the battery-chamber latch to the right (q), insert a fingernail into the gap and open the battery chamber (w). Ensure that the battery is inserted in the correct orientation (r).

• Wireless Remote Controller WR-R10/WR-T10: When a WR-R10 wireless remote controller is attached, the camera can be controlled wirelessly using a WR-T10 wireless remote

controller (

0 109, 282).

• Wireless Remote Controller WR-1 (

0 109, 282): The WR-1 can

function as either a transmitter or a receiver and is used in combination either with another WR-1 or a WR-R10 or

WR-T10 wireless remote controller. For example, a WR-1 can be connected to the accessory terminal for use as a receiver, allowing the shutter to be released remotely by another WR-1 acting as a transmitter.

(

Microphones Stereo Microphone ME-1

( 0 180)

Accessory terminal accessories

The D5500 is equipped with an accessory terminal for

WR-1

and WR-R10 wireless

remote controllers

(

0 109),

MC-DC2 remote cords

( 0 121),

and GP-1/GP-1A GPS units

(

0 283), which connect

with the H mark on the connector aligned with the F next to the accessory terminal (close the connector cover when the terminal is not in use).

USB and A/V connector accessories

HDMI cables

0 222)

• UC-E23 and UC-E6 USB cables (

UC-E23 cable is not available for separate purchase; purchase UC-E6 cables instead.

• EG-CP16 audio/video cables

0 211, 214): The supplied

HDMI Cable HC-E1

: An HDMI cable with a type C connector for connection to the camera and a type A connector for connection to HDMI devices.

A

Optional Accessories

Availability may vary with country or region. See our website or brochures for the latest information.

Technical Notes

333

Approved Memory Cards

The following SD memory cards have been tested and approved for use in the camera. Cards with class 6 or faster write speeds are recommended for movie recording. Recording may end unexpectedly when cards with slower write speeds are used.

SanDisk

Toshiba

SD memory cards

2 GB

1

SDHC memory cards

2

4 GB, 8 GB, 16 GB, 32 GB

SDXC memory cards

3

64 GB, 128 GB

64 GB

Panasonic

2 GB

1

4 GB, 6 GB, 8 GB, 12 GB,

16 GB, 24 GB, 32 GB

4 GB, 8 GB, 16 GB, 32 GB

48 GB, 64 GB

Lexar Media

Platinum II

Professional

8 GB, 16 GB, 32 GB

64 GB

64 GB, 128 GB,

256 GB

Full-HD Video

4 GB, 8 GB, 16 GB

1 Check that any card readers or other devices with which the card will be used support 2 GB cards.

2 Check that any card readers or other devices with which the card will be used are SDHCcompliant. The camera supports UHS-I.

3 Check that any card readers or other devices with which the card will be used are SDXC-compliant. The camera supports UHS-I.

Other cards have not been tested. For more details on the above cards, please contact the manufacturer.

334 Technical Notes

Attaching a Power Connector and AC Adapter

Turn the camera off before attaching an optional power connector and AC adapter.

1

Ready the camera.

Open the battery-chamber

(q) and power connector

(w) covers.

2

Insert the EP-5A power connector.

Be sure to insert the connector in the orientation shown, using the connector to keep the orange battery latch pressed to one side. Be sure the connector is fully inserted.

3

Close the battery-chamber cover.

Position the power connector cable so that it passes through the power connector slot and close the battery-chamber cover.

Technical Notes

335

4

Connect the EH-5b AC adapter.

Connect the AC adapter power cable to the AC socket on AC adapter (e) and the power cable to the DC socket (r). A P icon is displayed in the monitor when the camera is powered by the AC adapter and power connector.

336 Technical Notes

Caring for the Camera

Storage

When the camera will not be used for an extended period, remove the battery and store it in a cool, dry area with the terminal cover in place. To prevent mold or mildew, store the camera in a dry, well-ventilated area. Do not store your camera with naphtha or camphor moth balls or in locations that:

are poorly ventilated or subject to humidities of over 60%

are next to equipment that produces strong electromagnetic fields, such as televisions or radios

are exposed to temperatures above 50 °C (122 °F) or below

–10 °C (14 °F)

Cleaning

Camera body

Lens, mirror, and viewfinder

Monitor

Use a blower to remove dust and lint, then wipe gently with a soft, dry cloth. After using the camera at the beach or seaside, wipe off sand or salt with a cloth lightly dampened in distilled water and dry thoroughly. Important:

Dust or other foreign matter inside the camera may cause

damage not covered under warranty.

These glass elements are easily damaged. Remove dust and lint with a blower. If using an aerosol blower, keep the can vertical to prevent the discharge of liquid. To remove fingerprints and other stains, apply a small amount of lens cleaner to a soft cloth and clean with care.

Remove dust and lint with a blower. When removing fingerprints and other stains, wipe the surface lightly with a soft cloth or chamois leather. Do not apply pressure, as this could result in damage or malfunction.

Do not use alcohol, thinner, or other volatile chemicals.

Technical Notes

337

Image Sensor Cleaning

If you suspect that dirt or dust on the image sensor is appearing in photographs, you can clean the sensor using the Clean image

sensor option in the setup menu. The sensor can be cleaned at any time using the Clean now option, or cleaning can be performed automatically when the camera is turned on or off.

❚❚ “Clean Now”

Holding the camera base down, select

Clean image sensor in the setup menu, then highlight Clean now and press J.

The camera will check the image sensor and then begin cleaning.

1 flashes in the viewfinder and other operations can not be performed while cleaning is in progress. Do not remove or disconnect the power source until cleaning ends and the setup menu is displayed.

338 Technical Notes

❚❚ “Clean at Startup/Shutdown”

1

Select Clean at startup/shutdown.

Select Clean image sensor, then highlight Clean at startup/

shutdown and press 2.

2

Select an option.

Highlight an option and press

J.

Choose from Clean at startup, Clean

at shutdown, Clean at startup &

shutdown, and Cleaning off.

D

Image Sensor Cleaning

Using camera controls during startup interrupts image sensor cleaning.

Cleaning is performed by vibrating the image sensor.

If dust can not be fully removed using the options in the Clean image sensor menu, clean the image sensor manually (

0 340) or consult a Nikon-

authorized service representative.

If image sensor cleaning is performed several times in succession, image sensor cleaning may be temporarily disabled to protect the camera’s internal circuitry.

Cleaning can be performed again after a short wait.

Technical Notes

339

❚❚ Manual Cleaning

If foreign matter can not be removed from the image sensor using the Clean image sensor option in the setup menu

(

0 338), the sensor can be cleaned manually as described

below. Note, however, that the sensor is extremely delicate and easily damaged. Nikon recommends that the sensor be cleaned only by Nikon-authorized service personnel.

1

Charge the battery.

A reliable power source is required when inspecting or cleaning the image sensor. Be sure the battery is fully charged before proceeding.

2

Remove the lens.

Turn the camera off and remove the lens.

3

Select Lock mirror up for cleaning.

Turn the camera on and highlight

Lock mirror up for cleaning in the setup menu and press

2 (note that this option is not available at battery levels of H or below).

4

Press

J.

The message shown at right will be displayed in the monitor.

5

Raise the mirror.

Press the shutter-release button all the way down. The mirror will be raised and the shutter curtain will open, revealing the image sensor.

340 Technical Notes

6

Examine the image sensor.

Holding the camera so that light falls on the image sensor, examine the interior of the camera for dust or lint.

If no foreign objects are present, proceed to Step 8.

7

Clean the sensor.

Remove any dust and lint from the sensor with a blower. Do not use a blower-brush, as the bristles could damage the sensor. Dirt that can not be removed with a blower can only be removed by Nikon-authorized service personnel. Under no circumstances should you touch or wipe the sensor.

8

Turn the camera off.

The mirror will return to the down position and the shutter curtain will close. Replace the lens or body cap.

A

Use a Reliable Power Source

The shutter curtain is delicate and easily damaged. If the camera powers off while the mirror is raised, the curtain will close automatically. To prevent damage to the curtain, observe the following precautions:

Do not turn the camera off or remove or disconnect the power source while the mirror is raised.

If the battery runs low while the mirror is raised, a beep will sound and the self-timer lamp will flash to warn that the shutter curtain will close and the mirror will be lowered after about two minutes. End cleaning or inspection immediately.

Technical Notes

341

D

Foreign Matter on the Image Sensor

Foreign matter entering the camera when lenses or body caps are removed or exchanged (or in rare circumstances lubricant or fine particles from the camera itself ) may adhere to the image sensor, where it may appear in photographs taken under certain conditions.

To protect the camera when no lens is in place, be sure to replace the body cap provided with the camera, being careful to first remove all dust and other foreign matter that may be adhering to the camera mount, lens mount, and body cap. Avoid attaching the body cap or exchanging lenses in dusty environments.

Should foreign matter find its way onto the image sensor, use the

image sensor cleaning option as described on page 338. If the

problem persists, clean the sensor manually (

0 340) or have the

sensor cleaned by authorized Nikon service personnel. Photographs affected by the presence of foreign matter on the sensor can be retouched using the clean image options available in some imaging applications.

D

Servicing the Camera and Accessories

The camera is a precision device and requires regular servicing. Nikon recommends that the camera be inspected by the original retailer or

Nikon-authorized service representative once every one to two years, and that it be serviced once every three to five years (note that fees apply to these services). Frequent inspection and servicing are particularly recommended if the camera is used professionally. Any accessories regularly used with the camera, such as lenses or optional flash units, should be included when the camera is inspected or serviced.

342 Technical Notes

Caring for the Camera and Battery:

Cautions

Do not drop

: The product may malfunction if subjected to strong shocks or vibration.

Keep dry

: This product is not waterproof, and may malfunction if immersed in water or exposed to high levels of humidity. Rusting of the internal mechanism can cause irreparable damage.

Avoid sudden changes in temperature

: Sudden changes in temperature, such as those that occur when entering or leaving a heated building on a cold day, can cause condensation inside the device. To prevent condensation, place the device in a carrying case or plastic bag before exposing it to sudden changes in temperature.

Keep away from strong magnetic fields

: Do not use or store this device in the vicinity of equipment that generates strong electromagnetic radiation or magnetic fields. Strong static charges or the magnetic fields produced by equipment such as radio transmitters could interfere with the monitor, damage data stored on the memory card, or affect the product’s internal circuitry.

Do not leave the lens pointed at the sun

: Do not leave the lens pointed at the sun or other strong light source for an extended period. Intense light may cause the image sensor to deteriorate or produce a white blur effect in photographs.

Turn the product off before removing or disconnecting the power source

: Do not unplug the product or remove the battery while the product is on or while images are being recorded or deleted. Forcibly cutting power in these circumstances could result in loss of data or in damage to product memory or internal circuitry. To prevent an accidental interruption of power, avoid carrying the product from one location to another while the AC adapter is connected.

Technical Notes

343

Cleaning

: When cleaning the camera body, use a blower to gently remove dust and lint, then wipe gently with a soft, dry cloth. After using the camera at the beach or seaside, wipe off any sand or salt using a cloth lightly dampened in pure water and then dry the camera thoroughly.

The lens and mirror are easily damaged. Dust and lint should be gently removed with a blower. When using an aerosol blower, keep the can vertical to prevent discharge of liquid. To remove fingerprints and other stains from the lens, apply a small amount of lens cleaner to a soft cloth and wipe the lens carefully.

See “Image Sensor Cleaning” (

0 338, 340) for information on cleaning

the image sensor.

Do not touch the shutter curtain

: The shutter curtain is extremely thin and easily damaged. Under no circumstances should you exert pressure on the curtain, poke it with cleaning tools, or subject it to powerful air currents from a blower. These actions could scratch, deform, or tear the curtain.

Storage

: To prevent mold or mildew, store the camera in a dry, wellventilated area. If you are using an AC adapter, unplug the adapter to prevent fire. If the product will not be used for an extended period, remove the battery to prevent leakage and store the camera in a plastic bag containing a desiccant. Do not, however, store the camera case in a plastic bag, as this may cause the material to deteriorate. Note that desiccant gradually loses its capacity to absorb moisture and should be replaced at regular intervals.

To prevent mold or mildew, take the camera out of storage at least once a month. Turn the camera on and release the shutter a few times before putting it away.

Store the battery in a cool, dry place. Replace the terminal cover before putting the battery away.

344 Technical Notes

Notes on the monitor

: The monitor is constructed with extremely high precision; at least 99.99% of pixels are effective, with no more than 0.01% being missing or defective. Hence while these displays may contain pixels that are always lit (white, red, blue, or green) or always off (black), this is not a malfunction and has no effect on images recorded with the device.

Images in the monitor may be difficult to see in a bright light.

Do not apply pressure to the monitor, as this could cause damage or malfunction. Dust or lint on the monitor can be removed with a blower.

Stains can be removed by wiping lightly with a soft cloth or chamois leather. Should the monitor break, care should be taken to avoid injury from broken glass and to prevent liquid crystal from the monitor touching the skin or entering the eyes and mouth.

Moiré

: Moiré is an interference pattern created by the interaction of an image containing a regular, repeating grid, such as the pattern of weave in cloth or windows in a building, with the camera image sensor grid. If you notice moiré in your photographs, try changing the distance to the subject, zooming in and out, or changing the angle between the subject and the camera.

The battery and charger

: Batteries may leak or explode if improperly

handled. Read and follow the warnings and cautions on pages xi–xiv of this

manual. Observe the following precautions when handling batteries:

Use only batteries approved for use in this equipment.

Do not expose the battery to flame or excessive heat.

Keep the battery terminals clean.

Turn the product off before replacing the battery.

Remove the battery from the camera or charger when not in use and replace the terminal cover. These devices draw minute amounts of charge even when off and could draw the battery down to the point that it will no longer function. If the battery will not be used for some time, insert it in the camera and run it flat before removing it and storing it in a location with an ambient temperature of 15 °C to 25 °C

(59 °F to 77 °F; avoid hot or extremely cold locations). Repeat this process at least once every six months.

Technical Notes

345

Turning the camera on and off repeatedly when the battery is fully discharged will shorten battery life. Batteries that have been fully discharged must be charged before use.

The internal temperature of the battery may rise while the battery is in use. Attempting to charge the battery while the internal temperature is elevated will impair battery performance, and the battery may not charge or charge only partially. Wait for the battery to cool before charging.

Charge the battery indoors at ambient temperatures of 5 °C–35 °C

(41 °F–95 °F). Do not use the battery at ambient temperatures below

0 °C (32 °F) or above 40 °C (104 °F); failure to observe this precaution could damage the battery or impair its performance. Capacity may be reduced and charging times may increase at battery temperatures from 0 °C (32 °F) to 15 °C (59 °F) and from 45 °C (113 °F) to 60 °C (140 °F).

The battery will not charge if its temperature is below 0 °C (32 °F) or above 60 °C (140 °F).

If the CHARGE lamp flashes quickly (about eight times a second) during charging, confirm that the temperature is in the correct range and then unplug the charger and remove and reinsert the battery. If the problem persists, cease use immediately and take battery and charger to your retailer or a Nikon-authorized service representative.

Do not move the charger or touch the battery during charging. Failure to observe this precaution could in very rare instances result in the charger showing that charging is complete when the battery is only partially charged. Remove and reinsert the battery to begin charging again.

Continuing to charge the battery after it is fully charged can impair battery performance.

A marked drop in the time a fully charged battery retains its charge when used at room temperature indicates that it requires replacement.

Purchase a new EN-EL14a battery.

Use the charger with compatible batteries only. Unplug when not in use.

346 Technical Notes

Charge the battery before use. When taking photographs on important occasions, ready a spare battery and keep it fully charged.

Depending on your location, it may be difficult to purchase replacement batteries on short notice. Note that on cold days, the capacity of batteries tends to decrease. Be sure the battery is fully charged before taking photographs outside in cold weather. Keep a spare battery in a warm place and exchange the two as necessary.

Once warmed, a cold battery may recover some of its charge.

Used batteries are a valuable resource; recycle in accord with local regulations.

Technical Notes

347

Available Settings

The following table lists the settings that can be adjusted in each mode. Note that some settings may be unavailable depending on the options selected.

k, p, n, o, s, w, i j

P, S,

A, M

0

— — z z

1 l, m, r, t, u, v, x, y, z %

S,

T U ' ( 3

1,

2,

3 z 1

— z

1 z 1 z 1 z 1 z 1 z 1

ISO sensitivity

White balance

— — z — — — — — — — — —

Set Picture Control

— — z — — — — — — — — —

Active D-Lighting

2

2 z — 2

2

— — —

2

— — — —

HDR (high dynamic range)

— — z — — — — — — — — —

Long exposure NR

High ISO NR z z z z z — z z z z z z z z z z z — z z z z z z

Focus mode

(viewfinder)

AF-area mode

(viewfinder)

Focus mode (live view/movie)

AF-area mode (live view/movie) z z z z z — z z z z z z z z z z z — z z z — z z z z z z z z z z z z z z

— — z z z z

3 z z

3 z

3

— z

3 z

348 Technical Notes

i j

P, S,

A, M

k, p, n, o, s, w,

0 l, m, r, t, u, v, x, y, z %

S,

T U ' ( 3

1,

2,

3

— — z — — — — — — — — —

— — z — — — — — — — — —

Metering

Bracketing

Flash compensation — — z z z — — — — — — —

Exposure compensation

Flash mode

— — z z z z — — — — — — z — z z 4

— — z z z — — — a3: Built-in AF-assist illuminator e1: Flash cntrl for built-in flash/

Optional flash z z z z 5 z 6

— z z z — z z

— — z — — — — — — — — — e2: Auto bracketing set

— — z — — — — — — — — —

1

Auto ISO sensitivity control is not available.

2 Fixed at Auto.

3 Subject-tracking AF is not available.

4 Not available in

0 mode.

5 Not available in w mode.

6 Available only in x, y, and z modes.

Technical Notes

349

Troubleshooting

If the camera fails to function as expected, check the list of common problems below before consulting your retailer or

Nikon-authorized service representative.

Battery/Display

The camera is on but does not respond

: Wait for recording to end. If the problem persists, turn the camera off. If the camera does not turn off, remove and reinsert the battery or, if you are using an AC adapter, disconnect and reconnect the AC adapter. Note that although any data currently being recorded will be lost, data that have already been recorded will not be affected by removing or disconnecting the power source.

Viewfinder is out of focus

: Adjust viewfinder focus ( 0 33). If this does not

correct the problem, select single-servo autofocus (AF-S;

0 78), single-

point AF (

c; 0 82), and the center focus point, and then frame a high-

contrast subject in the center focus point and press the shutter-release button halfway to focus the camera. With the camera in focus, use the diopter adjustment control to bring the subject into clear focus in the viewfinder. If necessary, viewfinder focus can be further adjusted using

optional corrective lenses ( 0 331).

Viewfinder is dark

: Insert a fully-charged battery ( 0 27, 28).

Displays turn off without warning

: Choose longer delays for Custom Setting c2 (Auto off timers;

0 253).

Information display does not appear in monitor

: Shutter-release button is pressed halfway or eye sensor has turned display off. If information display does not appear when you remove your finger from shutterrelease button or uncover eye sensor, confirm that On is selected for

Auto info display (

0 278) and that battery is charged (0 27).

Viewfinder display is unresponsive and dim

: The response times and brightness of this display vary with temperature.

350 Technical Notes

Fine lines are visible around active focus point or display turns red when focus point is highlighted

: These phenomena are normal for this type of viewfinder and do not indicate a malfunction.

Shooting (All Modes)

Camera takes time to turn on

: Delete files or folders.

Shutter-release disabled

:

Memory card is locked, full, or not inserted (

0 28, 35).

• Release locked is selected for Slot empty release lock ( 0 281) and no

memory card is inserted (

0 28).

Built-in flash is charging (

0 44).

Camera is not in focus (

0 40).

CPU lens with aperture ring attached but aperture not locked at

highest f-number ( 0 315).

Non-CPU lens is attached but camera is not in mode M (

0 316).

Only one shot taken each time shutter-release button is pressed in continuous shooting mode

: Continuous shooting is not available if built-in flash fires (

0 73,

93).

Final photo is larger than area shown in viewfinder

: Viewfinder horizontal and vertical frame coverage is approximately 95%.

Photos are out of focus

:

AF-S, AF-P, or AF-I lens is not attached: use AF-S, AF-P, or AF-I lens or focus manually.

Camera unable to focus using autofocus: use manual focus or focus

lock (

0 80, 86, 88).

Camera is in manual focus mode: focus manually ( 0 88).

Focus does not lock when shutter-release button is pressed halfway

: Use

A (L) button to lock focus when live view is off and AF-C is selected for focus mode or when photographing moving subjects in AF-A mode (

0 86).

Technical Notes

351

Can not select focus point

:

e (Auto-area AF; 0 83) is selected: choose another AF-area mode.

Press shutter-release button halfway to start standby timer ( 0 44).

Can not select AF-area mode

: Manual focus selected (

0 78, 164).

AF-assist illuminator does not light:

AF-assist illuminator does not light if AF-C is selected for autofocus

mode (

0 78) or if continuous-servo autofocus is selected when the

camera is in AF-A mode. Choose AF-S. If an option other than e (Auto-area AF) is selected for AF-area mode, select center focus

point (

0 82, 85).

The camera is currently in live view or a movie is being recorded.

• Off is selected for Custom Setting a3 (Built-in AF-assist illuminator,

0 250).

Illuminator has turned off automatically. Illuminator may become hot with continued use; wait for it to cool down.

Image size can not be changed

: Image quality set to NEF (RAW) ( 0 91).

Camera is slow to record photos

:

Depending on shooting conditions and memory card performance, memory card access lamp may light for up to about a minute after shooting ends in continuous release modes.

Turn long exposure noise reduction off ( 0 243).

Randomly-spaced bright pixels appear in photos

:

Choose lower ISO sensitivity or turn high ISO noise reduction on

( 0 244).

Turn Active D-Lighting off to avoid heightening the effects of noise

( 0 134).

352 Technical Notes

No photo taken when remote control shutter-release button is pressed

:

Replace battery in remote control (

0 332).

Choose remote control release mode ( 0 107).

Flash is charging (

0 109).

Time selected for Custom Setting c4 (Remote on duration (ML-L3),

0 254) has elapsed.

Bright light is interfering with ML-L3 remote control.

Can not choose a release mode

: Release mode selection is not available when

the monitor is off ( 0 71). Note that the eye sensor may turn the monitor

off automatically when you put your eye to the viewfinder.

Beep does not sound

:

• Off is selected for Beep options > Beep on/off (

0 276).

Camera is in quiet shutter-release mode ( 0 74), or movie is being

recorded ( 0 174).

• MF or AF-C is selected as the focus mode or subject moves when AF-A is selected (

0 78).

Smudges appear in photographs

: Clean front and rear lens elements. If

problem persists, perform image sensor cleaning ( 0 338).

Date is not imprinted on photos

: An NEF (RAW) option is selected for image

quality (

0 91, 256).

Sound is not recorded with movies

: Microphone off is selected for Movie

settings > Microphone (

0 178).

Live view ends unexpectedly or does not start

: Live view may end automatically to prevent damage to the camera’s internal circuits if:

The ambient temperature is high

The camera has been used for extended periods in live view or to record movies

The camera has been used in continuous release modes for extended periods

If live view or movie recording does not start when you attempt to start live view, wait for the internal circuits to cool and then try again. Note that the camera may feel warm to the touch, but this does not indicate a malfunction.

Technical Notes

353

Image artifacts appear during live view

: The temperature of the camera’s internal circuits may rise during live view, causing image “noise” in the form of bright spots, randomly-spaced bright pixels, or fog. Exit live view when the camera is not in use.

Flicker or banding appears during live view or movie recording

: Choose an option for Flicker reduction that matches the frequency of the local AC power

supply (

0 281).

Bright bands appear during live view or movie recording

: A flashing sign, flash, or other light source with brief duration was used during live view or movie recording.

Menu item can not be selected

: Some options are not available in all modes.

Shooting (P, S, A, M)

Shutter-release disabled

:

Non-CPU lens is attached: rotate camera mode dial to M (

0 316).

Mode dial rotated to S after shutter speed of “Bulb” or “Time” selected in mode M: choose new shutter speed (

0 117).

If white-balance bracketing is active, shutter release will be disabled and viewfinder exposure-count display will flash if there is insufficient space on memory card to record all images in bracketing sequence.

Insert new memory card.

Full range of shutter speeds not available

:

Flash in use ( 0 98).

When On is selected for Movie settings > Manual movie settings in the shooting menu, the range of available shutter speed varies with the frame rate (

0 179).

Can not select desired aperture

: Range of available apertures varies with lens used.

Colors are unnatural

:

Adjust white balance to match light source (

0 137).

Adjust Set Picture Control settings (

0 152).

354 Technical Notes

Can not measure white balance

: Subject is too dark or too bright ( 0 144).

Image can not be selected as source for preset white balance

: Image was not

created with D5500 ( 0 146).

White balance bracketing unavailable

: NEF (RAW) or NEF+JPEG image quality option selected for image quality (

0 90).

Effects of Picture Control differ from image to image

: A (auto) is selected for sharpening, clarity, contrast, or saturation. For consistent results over a series of photos, choose another setting (

0 156).

Metering can not be changed

: Autoexposure lock is in effect ( 0 127).

Exposure compensation can not be used

: Camera is in mode M. Choose another

mode (

0 113, 129).

Noise (reddish areas or other artifacts) appears in long time-exposures

: Enable long

exposure noise reduction ( 0 243).

Playback

NEF (RAW) image is not played back

: Photo was taken at image quality of NEF

(RAW)+JPEG (

0 90).

Can not view pictures recorded with other cameras

: Pictures recorded with other makes of camera may not be displayed correctly.

Some pictures are not displayed during playback

: Select All for Playback folder

( 0 234).

“Tall” (portrait) orientation photos are displayed in “wide” (landscape) orientation

:

Select On for Rotate tall (

0 235).

Photo was taken with Off selected for Auto image rotation (

0 235).

Photo is displayed in image review (

0 234).

Camera was pointed up or down when photo was taken (

0 235).

Can not delete picture

:

Picture is protected: remove protection ( 0 202).

Memory card is locked ( 0 35).

Technical Notes

355

Can not retouch picture

: Photo can not be further edited with this camera

(

0 287).

Can not change print order

:

Memory card is full: delete pictures (

0 49, 205).

Memory card is locked (

0 35).

Can not select photo for printing

: Photo is in NEF (RAW) format. Create JPEG copy using NEF (RAW) processing or transfer to computer and print

using ViewNX 2 or Capture NX-D ( 0 210).

Picture is not displayed on TV

:

Choose correct video mode (

0 281) or output resolution (0 223).

A/V (

0 220) or HDMI (0 222) cable is not correctly connected.

Camera does not respond to remote control for HDMI-CEC television

:

Select On for HDMI > Device control in the setup menu (

0 223).

Adjust HDMI-CEC settings for the television as described in documentation provided with the device.

Can not transfer photos to computer

: OS not compatible with camera or transfer software. Use card reader to copy photos to computer.

Image Dust Off option in Capture NX-D does not have desired effect

: Image sensor cleaning changes the position of dust on the image sensor. Image Dust

Off reference data recorded before image sensor cleaning is performed can not be used with photographs taken after image sensor cleaning is performed. Image Dust Off reference data recorded after image sensor cleaning is performed can not be used with photographs taken before image sensor cleaning is performed (

0 279).

Computer displays NEF (RAW) images differently from camera

: Third-party software does not display effects of Picture Controls, Active D-Lighting, or vignette control. Use ViewNX 2 or Capture NX-D (

0 210).

356 Technical Notes

Wi-Fi (Wireless Networks)

Smart devices do not display the camera SSID (network name)

:

Confirm that Enable is selected for Wi-Fi > Network connection in the

camera setup menu (

0 229).

Try turning the smart device Wi-Fi off and then on again.

Miscellaneous

Date of recording is not correct

: Set camera clock (

0 32, 275).

Menu item can not be selected

: Some options are not available at certain combinations of settings or when no memory card is inserted (

0 28,

286, 348).

Technical Notes

357

Error Messages

This section lists the indicators and error messages that appear in the viewfinder and monitor.

A

Warning Icons

A flashing d in the monitor or s in the viewfinder indicates that a warning or error message can be displayed in the monitor by pressing the

W (Q) button.

Monitor

Indicator

Lock lens aperture ring at minimum aperture

(largest f/-number).

Lens not attached

Before taking photos, rotate the zoom ring to extend the lens.

Viewfinder

B

(flashes)

F/s

(flashes)

F

(flashes)

Solution

0

Set lens aperture ring to minimum aperture (highest f-number).

A lens with a retractable lens barrel button is attached with the lens barrel retracted. Press the retractable lens barrel button and rotate the zoom ring to extend the lens.

315

Attach non-IX NIKKOR lens.

315

If non-CPU lens is attached, select mode M.

119

30

Shutter release disabled. Recharge battery.

This battery cannot be used. Choose battery designated for use in this camera.

Initialization error.

Turn camera off and then on again.

d/s

(flashes) d

(flashes)

Turn camera off and recharge or replace battery.

Use Nikon-approved battery.

27, 31

330

d/k

(flashes)

Turn camera off, remove and replace battery, and then turn camera on again.

28, 31

358 Technical Notes

Monitor

Indicator

Battery level is low.

Complete operation and turn camera off immediately.

Viewfinder

Solution

End cleaning and turn camera off and recharge or replace battery.

Clock not set

No memory card inserted

Memory card is locked.

Slide lock to “write” position.

This memory card cannot be used. Card may be damaged.

Insert another card.

0

341

— Set camera clock.

S/s

(flashes)

(

(flashes)

(/k

(flashes)

Turn camera off and confirm that card is correctly inserted.

Memory card is locked (write protected). Slide card writeprotect switch to “write” position.

Use approved card.

Format card. If problem persists, card may be damaged. Contact Nikonauthorized service representative.

Error creating new folder.

Delete files or insert new memory card.

Insert new memory card.

Eye-Fi card is still emitting wireless signal after Disable has been selected for Eye-Fi

upload. To terminate wireless transmission, turn the camera off and remove the card.

32,

275

28

35

334

272

28,

205

28

284

Technical Notes

359

Monitor

Indicator

Not available if Eye-Fi card is locked.

This card is not formatted.

Format the card.

Card is full

Subject is too bright

Subject is too dark

Viewfinder

(/k

(flashes)

T

(flashes) j/A/s

(flashes)

(flashes) s

(flashes)

Solution

0

Eye-Fi card is locked (write protected). Slide card writeprotect switch to “write” position.

Format card or turn camera off and insert new memory card.

Reduce quality or size.

Delete photographs.

Insert new memory card.

Camera can not focus using autofocus. Change composition or focus manually.

Use a lower ISO sensitivity.

Use commercial ND filter.

35

28,

272

90

205

28

40, 80,

88

100

330

In mode:

S

Increase shutter speed

A

Choose a smaller aperture (higher f-number)

% Choose another shooting mode

117

118

4, 61

Use a higher ISO sensitivity.

100

Use flash.

93

In mode:

S

Lower shutter speed

A

Choose a larger aperture

(lower f-number)

117

118

360 Technical Notes

Monitor

Indicator

No “Bulb” in S mode

No “Time” in S mode

No “Bulb” in HDR mode

No “Time” in HDR mode

Interval timer shooting

Viewfinder Solution

0

A/s

(flashes)

Change shutter speed or

&/s

(flashes) select mode M.

A/s

(flashes)

Change shutter speed.

&/s

(flashes)

Turn HDR off.

N

(flashes)

N/s

(flashes)

Menus and playback are not available while interval timer photography is in progress. To pause, press J.

Flash has fired at full power.

Check photo in monitor; if underexposed, adjust settings and try again.

Use the flash.

Change distance to subject, aperture, flash range, or ISO sensitivity.

Lens focal length is less than

18 mm: use a longer focal length.

Optional SB-400 or SB-300 flash unit attached: flash is in bounce position or focus distance is very short.

Continue shooting; if necessary, increase focus distance to prevent shadows from appearing in photograph.

117,

119

120,

121

135

101

93

98, 99,

118

Technical Notes

361

Monitor

Indicator

Viewfinder

Error. Press shutter release button again.

O

(flashes)

Solution

Release shutter. If error persists or appears frequently, consult Nikon-authorized service representative.

Start-up error. Contact a Nikon-authorized service representative.

Metering error

Unable to start live view.

Please wait for camera to cool.

Consult Nikon-authorized service representative.

Folder contains no images.

Cannot display this file.

Cannot select this file.

This movie cannot be edited.

No image for retouching.

0

Wait for the internal circuits to cool before resuming live view or movie recording.

353

Folder selected for playback contains no images. Select folder containing images from Playback folder menu or insert memory card containing images.

File can not be played back on camera.

Images created with other devices can not be retouched.

Movies created with other devices can not be edited.

Movies must be at least two seconds long.

Memory card does not contain NEF (RAW) images for use with NEF (RAW)

processing.

28,

234

288

288

185

289

362 Technical Notes

Could not connect; multiple devices detected. Try again later.

Error

Monitor

Indicator

Viewfinder

Network access not available until camera cools.

Check printer.

Check paper.

Paper jam.

Out of paper.

Check ink supply.

Out of ink.

Solution

Multiple smart devices are attempting to connect to camera simultaneously. Wait a few minutes before trying again.

Select Disable for Wi-Fi >

Network connection, then select Enable again.

Turn camera off and try again after waiting for camera to cool.

Check printer. To resume, select Continue (if available).

Paper is not selected size.

Insert paper of correct size and select Continue.

Clear jam and select

Continue.

Insert paper of selected size and select Continue.

Check ink. To resume, select

Continue.

Replace ink and select

Continue.

* See printer manual for more information.

0

225

230

*

*

*

*

*

*

Technical Notes

363

Specifications

❚❚ Nikon D5500 Digital Camera

Type

Type

Lens mount

Effective angle of view

Single-lens reflex digital camera

Nikon F mount (with AF contacts)

Nikon DX format; focal length equivalent to approx. 1.5× that of lenses with FX format angle of view

Effective pixels

Effective pixels

24.2 million

Image sensor

Image sensor

Total pixels

23.5 × 15.6 mm CMOS sensor

24.78 million

Dust-reduction System

Image sensor cleaning, Image Dust Off reference data (Capture NX-D software required)

Storage

Image size (pixels)

File format

Picture Control System

Media

File system

6000 × 4000 (Large)

4496 × 3000 (Medium)

2992 × 2000 (Small)

• NEF (RAW): 12- or 14 bit, compressed

• JPEG: JPEG-Baseline compliant with fine

(approx. 1 : 4), normal (approx. 1 : 8), or basic

(approx. 1 : 16) compression

• NEF (RAW)+JPEG: Single photograph recorded in both NEF (RAW) and JPEG formats

Standard, Neutral, Vivid, Monochrome, Portrait,

Landscape, Flat; selected Picture Control can be modified; storage for custom Picture Controls

SD (Secure Digital) and UHS-I compliant SDHC and SDXC memory cards

DCF 2.0, DPOF, Exif 2.3, PictBridge

364 Technical Notes

Viewfinder

Viewfinder

Frame coverage

Magnification

Eyepoint

Diopter adjustment

Focusing screen

Reflex mirror

Lens aperture

Lens

Compatible lenses

Shutter

Type

Speed

Flash sync speed

Eye-level pentamirror single-lens reflex viewfinder

Approx. 95% horizontal and 95% vertical

Approx. 0.82× (50 mm f/1.4 lens at infinity,

–1.0 m

–1

)

17 mm (–1.0 m

–1

; from center surface of viewfinder eyepiece lens)

–1.7–+0.5 m

–1

Type B BriteView Clear Matte Mark VII screen

Quick return

Instant return, electronically controlled

Autofocus is available with AF-S, AF-P, and AF-I lenses. Autofocus is not available with other type G and D lenses, AF lenses (IX NIKKOR and lenses for the F3AF are not supported), and AI-P lenses. Non-CPU lenses can be used in mode M, but the camera exposure meter will not function.

The electronic rangefinder can be used with lenses that have a maximum aperture of f/5.6 or faster.

Electronically-controlled vertical-travel focalplane shutter

1

/

4000

– 30 s in steps of

1

/

3

or

1

/

2

EV; Bulb; Time

X=

1

/

200 s; synchronizes with shutter at

1

/

200 s or slower

Technical Notes

365

Release

Release mode

Frame advance rate

8 (single frame), ! (continuous L),

9 (continuous H), J (quiet shutter release),

E (self-timer), " (delayed remote; ML-L3),

# (quick-response remote; ML-L3); interval timer photography supported

!: Up to 3 fps

9: Up to 5 fps (JPEG and 12-bit NEF/RAW) or

4 fps (14-bit NEF/RAW)

Note

: Frame rates assume continuous-servo AF, manual or shutter-priority auto exposure, a shutter speed of

1

/

250 s or faster, Release selected for Custom Setting a1 (AF-C priority

selection), and other settings at default values.

2 s, 5 s, 10 s, 20 s; 1–9 exposures

Self-timer

Exposure

Metering mode

Metering method

TTL exposure metering using 2016-pixel RGB sensor

• Matrix metering: 3D color matrix metering II

(type G, E, and D lenses); color matrix metering II (other CPU lenses)

• Center-weighted metering: Weight of 75% given to 8-mm circle in center of frame

• Spot metering: Meters 3.5-mm circle (about

2.5% of frame) centered on selected focus

Range (ISO 100, f/1.4 lens,

20 °C/68 °F)

point

• Matrix or center-weighted metering: 0–20 EV

• Spot metering: 2–20 EV

Exposure meter coupling

CPU

366 Technical Notes

Exposure

Mode

Auto modes ( i auto; j auto, flash off ); programmed auto with flexible program (P); shutter-priority auto (S); aperture-priority auto

(A); manual (M); scene modes ( k portrait; l landscape; p child; m sports; n close up; o night portrait; r night landscape; s party/ indoor; t beach/snow; u sunset; v dusk/ dawn; w pet portrait; x candlelight; y blossom; z autumn colors; 0 food); special effects modes

(

% night vision; S super vivid; T pop; U photo illustration;

' toy camera effect; ( miniature effect; 3 selective color; 1 silhouette; 2 high key;

3 low key)

Exposure compensation

Can be adjusted by –5 – +5 EV in increments of

1

/

3

or

1

/

2

EV in P, S, A, M, h, and % modes

Exposure bracketing

3 shots in steps of

1

/

3

or

1

/

2

EV

White balance bracketing

3 shots in steps of 1

ADL bracketing

2 shots

Exposure lock

ISO sensitivity

(Recommended Exposure

Luminosity locked at detected value with

A (L) button

ISO 100 – 25600 in steps of

1

/

3

EV. Auto ISO sensitivity control available

Index)

Active D-Lighting

Y Auto, Z Extra high, P High, Q Normal,

R Low, ! Off

Focus

Autofocus

Detection range

Nikon Multi-CAM 4800DX autofocus sensor module with TTL phase detection, 39 focus points (including 9 cross-type sensor), and

AF-assist illuminator (range approx. 0.5–3 m/

1 ft 8 in.–9 ft 10 in.)

–1 – +19 EV (ISO 100, 20 °C/68 °F)

Technical Notes

367

Focus

Lens servo

Focus point

AF-area mode

Focus lock

Flash

Built-in flash

Guide Number

Flash control

Flash mode

Flash compensation

Flash-ready indicator

• Autofocus (AF): Single-servo AF (AF-S); continuous-servo AF (AF-C); auto AF-S/AF-C selection (AF-A); predictive focus tracking activated automatically according to subject status

• Manual focus (MF): Electronic rangefinder can be used

Can be selected from 39 or 11 focus points

Single-point AF, 9-, 21-, or 39- point dynamicarea AF, 3D-tracking, auto-area AF

Focus can be locked by pressing shutter-release button halfway (single-servo AF) or by pressing

A (L) button i, k, p, n, o, s, w, S, T, U, ' : Auto flash with auto pop-up

P

, S, A, M, 0: Manual pop-up with button release

Approx. 12/39, 12/39 with manual flash (m/ft,

ISO 100, 20 °C/68 °F)

TTL

: i-TTL flash control using 2016-pixel RGB sensor is available with built-in flash; i-TTL balanced fill-flash for digital SLR is used with matrix and center-weighted metering, standard i-TTL flash for digital SLR with spot metering

Auto, auto with red-eye reduction, auto slow sync, auto slow sync with red-eye reduction, fillflash, red-eye reduction, slow sync, slow sync with red-eye reduction, rear-curtain with slow sync, rear-curtain sync, off

Can be adjusted by –3 – +1 EV in increments of

1

/

3

or

1

/

2

EV in P, S, A, M, and h modes

Lights when built-in flash or optional flash unit is fully charged; blinks after flash is fired at full output

368 Technical Notes

Flash

Accessory shoe

Nikon Creative Lighting

System (CLS)

Sync terminal

ISO 518 hot-shoe with sync and data contacts and safety lock

Advanced Wireless Lighting supported with

SB-910, SB-900, SB-800, SB-700, or SB-500 as a master flash or SU-800 as commander; Flash

Color Information Communication supported with all CLS-compatible flash units

AS-15 sync terminal adapter (available separately)

White balance

White balance

Auto, incandescent, fluorescent (7 types), direct sunlight, flash, cloudy, shade, preset manual, all except preset manual with fine-tuning.

Live view

Lens servo

• Autofocus (AF): Single-servo AF (AF-S); full-timeservo AF (AF-F)

• Manual focus (MF)

AF-area mode

Face-priority AF, wide-area AF, normal-area AF, subject-tracking AF

Contrast-detect AF anywhere in frame (camera

Autofocus

selects focus point automatically when facepriority AF or subject-tracking AF is selected)

Automatic scene selection

Available in i and j modes

Movie

Metering

Metering method

TTL exposure metering using main image sensor

Matrix

Technical Notes

369

Movie

Frame size (pixels) and frame rate

1920 × 1080, 60p (progressive)/50p/30p/25p/

24p,

★ high/normal

1280 × 720, 60p/50p,

★ high/normal

640 × 424, 30p/25p,

★ high/normal

Frame rates of 30p (actual frame rate 29.97 fps) and 60p (actual frame rate 59.94 fps) are available when NTSC is selected for video mode. 25p and 50p are available when PAL is selected for video mode. Actual frame rate when 24p is selected is 23.976 fps.

File format

Video compression

MOV

H.264/MPEG-4 Advanced Video Coding

Audio recording format

Linear PCM

Audio recording device

Built-in or external stereo microphone; sensitivity adjustable

ISO sensitivity

ISO 100–25600

Monitor

Monitor

8.1 cm/3.2-in. (3 : 2), approx. 1037k-dot (720 ×

480 × 3 = 1,036,800 dots), TFT vari-angle LCD touch screen with 170 ° viewing angle, approx.

100% frame coverage, brightness adjustment, and eye-sensor controlled on/off

Playback

Playback

Full-frame and thumbnail (4, 12, or 80 images or calendar) playback with playback zoom, movie playback, photo and/or movie slide shows, histogram display, highlights, photo information, location data display, auto image rotation, picture rating, and image comment

(up to 36 characters)

370 Technical Notes

Interface

USB

Video output

HDMI output

Accessory terminal

Audio input

Hi-Speed USB; connection to built-in USB port is recommended

NTSC, PAL

Type C HDMI connector

Wireless remote controllers

: WR-1, WR-R10

(available separately)

Remote cords

: MC-DC2 (available separately)

GPS units

: GP-1/GP-1A (available separately)

Stereo mini-pin jack (3.5 mm diameter); supports optional ME-1 stereo microphones

Wireless

Standards

IEEE 802.11b, IEEE 802.11g

Communications protocols

• IEEE 802.11b: DSSS/CCK

• IEEE 802.11g: OFDM

Operating frequency

Range (line of sight)

2412–2462 MHz (channels 1–11)

Approximately 30 m/98 ft (assumes no

Data rate

interference; range may vary with signal strength and presence or absence of obstacles)

54 Mbps

Security

Wireless setup

Access protocols

Maximum logical data rates according to IEEE standard. Actual rates may differ.

• Authentication: Open system, WPA2-PSK

• Encryption: AES

Supports WPS

Infrastructure

Technical Notes

371

Supported languages

Supported languages

Arabic, Bengali, Bulgarian, Chinese (Simplified and Traditional), Czech, Danish, Dutch, English,

Finnish, French, German, Greek, Hindi,

Hungarian, Indonesian, Italian, Japanese,

Korean, Marathi, Norwegian, Persian, Polish,

Portuguese (Portugal and Brazil), Romanian,

Russian, Serbian, Spanish, Swedish, Tamil,

Telugu, Thai, Turkish, Ukrainian, Vietnamese

Power source

Battery

AC adapter

One EN-EL14a rechargeable Li-ion battery

EH-5b AC adapter; requires EP-5A power connector (available separately)

Tripod socket

Tripod socket

1

/

4

in. (ISO 1222)

Dimensions/weight

Dimensions (W × H × D)

Approx. 124 × 97 × 70 mm (4.9 × 3.9 × 2.8 in.)

Weight

Approx. 470 g (1 lb 0.6 oz) with battery and memory card but without body cap; approx.

420 g/14.9 oz (camera body only)

Operating environment

Temperature

Humidity

0 °C–40 °C (+32 °F–104 °F)

85% or less (no condensation)

• Unless otherwise stated, all measurements are performed in conformity with

Camera and

Imaging Products Association (CIPA) standards or guidelines.

• All figures are for a camera with a fully-charged battery.

• Nikon reserves the right to change the appearance and specifications of the hardware and software described in this manual at any time and without prior notice. Nikon will not be held liable for damages that may result from any mistakes that this manual may contain.

372 Technical Notes

❚❚ MH-24 Battery Charger

Rated input

AC 100–240 V, 50/60 Hz, 0.2 A maximum

Rated output

Supported batteries

Charging time

DC 8.4 V/0.9 A

Nikon Rechargeable Li-ion Battery EN-EL14a

Approx. 1 hour and 50 minutes at an ambient temperature of 25 °C (77 °F) when no charge

Operating temperature

remains

0 °C–40 °C (+32 °F–104 °F)

Dimensions (W × H × D)

Approx. 70 × 26 × 97 mm (2.8 × 1.0 × 3.8 in.), excluding plug adapter

Weight

Approx. 96 g (3.4 oz), excluding plug adapter

❚❚ EN-EL14a Rechargeable Li-ion Battery

Type

Rechargeable lithium-ion battery

Rated capacity

Operating temperature

7.2 V/1230 mAh

0°C–40 °C (+32 °F–104 °F)

Dimensions (W × H × D)

Approx. 38 × 53 × 14 mm (1.5 × 2.1 × 0.6 in.)

Weight

Approx. 49 g (1.7 oz), excluding terminal cover

Nikon reserves the right to change the appearance and specifications of the hardware and software described in this manual at any time and without prior notice. Nikon will not be held liable for damages that may result from any mistakes that this manual may contain.

Technical Notes

373

❚❚ Supported Standards

• DCF Version 2.0: The Design Rule for Camera File Systems (DCF) is a standard widely used in the digital camera industry to ensure compatibility among different makes of camera.

• DPOF: Digital Print Order Format (DPOF) is an industry-wide standard that allows pictures to be printed from print orders stored on the memory card.

• Exif version 2.3: The camera supports Exif (Exchangeable Image

File Format for Digital Still Cameras) version 2.3, a standard in which information stored with photographs is used for optimal color reproduction when the images are output on

Exif-compliant printers.

• PictBridge: A standard developed through cooperation with the digital camera and printer industries, allowing photographs to be output directly to a printer without first transferring them to a computer.

• HDMI: High-Definition Multimedia Interface is a standard for multimedia interfaces used in consumer electronics and AV devices capable of transmitting audiovisual data and control signals to HDMI-compliant devices via a single cable connection.

374 Technical Notes

A

Trademark Information

IOS is a trademark or registered trademark of Cisco Systems, Inc., in the

United States and/or other countries and is used under license.

Windows is either a registered trademark or a trademark of Microsoft

Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. PictBridge logo is a trademark. The SD, SDHC, and SDXC logos are trademarks of the SD-3C, LLC. HDMI, the HDMI logo and High-Definition Multimedia

Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing,

LLC.

Wi-Fi and the Wi-Fi logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of the

Wi-Fi Alliance. All other trade names mentioned in this manual or the other documentation provided with your Nikon product are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective holders.

A

Conformity Marking

The standards with which the camera complies can be viewed using

the Conformity marking option in the setup menu (

0 285).

A

FreeType License (FreeType2)

Portions of this software are copyright © 2012 The FreeType Project

(http://www.freetype.org). All rights reserved.

A

MIT License (HarfBuzz)

Portions of this software are copyright © 2014 The HarfBuzz Project

(http://www.freedesktop.org/wiki/Software/HarfBuzz). All rights reserved.

Technical Notes

375

A

Certificates

376 Technical Notes

Lens Kits

The camera can be purchased as a kit with the lens listed below.

AF-P DX NIKKOR 18–55mm f/3.5–5.6G VR and

AF-P DX NIKKOR 18–55mm f/3.5–5.6G

These retractable lenses are for use exclusively with DX format

Nikon digital SLR cameras; SLR film cameras and D4-series, D3series, D2-series, D1-series, D800-series, D700, D610, D600,

D300-series, D200, D100, D90, D80, D70-series, D60, D50, D40series, D7000, D5100, D5000, D3200, D3100, D3000 digital SLR cameras are not supported. The parts of the lens are listed below.

Focal length mark

Focal length scale

Lens mounting mark

(

0 29)

CPU contacts

(

0 315)

Rear lens cap

Lens cap

Focus ring (

0 88, 165)

Retractable lens barrel button (

0 30)

Zoom ring (

0 39)

Technical Notes

377

❚❚ Focus

The focus mode can be selected using camera controls (

0 78).

Autofocus

Focus is adjusted automatically when the camera is in autofocus

mode ( 0 78). The focus ring can also be used to focus the

camera if the shutter-release button is kept pressed halfway (or if the AF-ON button is kept pressed); this is known as “autofocus with manual override” (M/A). Autofocus will resume when the shutter-release button is pressed halfway (or the AF-ON button is pressed) a second time. Note that touching the focus ring while autofocus is in effect will change the focus position.

Manual Focus

When the camera is in manual focus mode, focus can be

adjusted by rotating the lens focus ring ( 0 88). When the

camera is off or the standby timer has expired, the focus ring can not be used to focus and rotating the zoom ring will change the focus position; before focusing, turn the camera on or press the shutter-release button to reactivate the standby timer.

Users of D810-series, Df, D750, D7200, D7100, and D5200 cameras should note that if the standby timer is allowed to expire, the focus position will change when the timer is restarted. Refocus before shooting. Longer standby times are recommended for manual focus and in other situations in which you may not release the shutter immediately after focusing.

378 Technical Notes

❚❚ Using the Built-in Flash

When using the built-in flash, be sure the subject is at a range of at least 0.6 m (2 ft) and remove lens hoods to prevent vignetting

(shadows created where the end of the lens obscures the built-in flash).

Shadow Vignetting

Camera

D5500/D5300/D5200/D3300

Zoom position

18 mm

24, 35, 45, and

55 mm

Minimum distance without vignetting

1.0 m/3 ft 4 in.

No vignetting

❚❚ Vibration Reduction (VR, AF-P DX NIKKOR 18–55mm f/3.5–5.6G VR

Only)

When an AF-P DX NIKKOR 18–55mm f/3.5–5.6G VR is mounted on the camera, vibration reduction can be enabled or disabled using the Optical VR option in the shooting menu (

0 245). If On

is selected, vibration reduction will take effect whenever the shutter-release button is pressed halfway. Vibration reduction reduces blur caused by camera shake, allowing shutter speeds up to 4.0 stops slower than would otherwise be the case, increasing the range of shutter speeds available. The effects of

VR on shutter speed are measured according to Camera and

Imaging Products Association (CIPA) standards; FX-format lenses are measured using FX-format digital cameras, DX-format lenses using DX-format cameras. Zoom lenses are measured at maximum zoom.

Technical Notes

379

D

Vibration Reduction

When using vibration reduction, press the shutter-release button halfway and wait for the image in the viewfinder to stabilize before pressing the shutter-release button the rest of the way down.

When vibration reduction is active, the image in the viewfinder may jiggle after the shutter is released. This does not indicate a malfunction.

When the camera is panned, vibration reduction applies only to motion that is not part of the pan (if the camera is panned horizontally, for example, vibration reduction will be applied only to vertical shake), making it much easier to pan the camera smoothly in a wide arc.

If the camera is equipped with a built-in flash, vibration reduction will be disabled while the flash charges.

Vibration reduction is generally recommended when the camera is mounted on a tripod, although you may prefer to turn it off depending on shooting conditions and the type of tripod.

380 Technical Notes

❚❚ Supplied Accessories

55 mm snap-on Front Lens Cap LC-55A

Rear Lens Cap

❚❚ Compatible Accessories

55 mm screw-on filters

Rear Lens Cap LF-4

Lens Case CL-0815

Bayonet Hood HB-N106

Align the lens hood mounting mark (

●) with the lens hood alignment mark ( ) as shown in Figure q and then rotate the hood (w) until the

● mark is aligned with the lens hood lock mark (—).

When attaching or removing the hood, hold it near the symbol on its base and avoid gripping it too tightly. Vignetting may occur if the hood is not correctly attached. The hood can be reversed and mounted on the lens when not in use.

Technical Notes

381

❚❚ Specifications

Type

Focal length

Maximum aperture

Lens construction

Type G AF-P DX lens with built-in CPU and F mount

18–55 mm f/3.5–5.6

Angle of view

Focal length scale

Distance information

Zoom

12 elements in 9 groups (2 aspherical lens elements)

76° – 28° 50´

Graduated in millimeters (18, 24, 35, 45, 55)

Output to camera

Manual zoom using independent zoom ring

Focusing

Autofocus controlled by stepping motor; separate focus ring for manual focus

Vibration reduction (AF-P

DX NIKKOR 18–55mm f/3.5–5.6G VR only)

Lens shift using voice coil motors (VCMs)

Minimum focus distance

0.25 m (0.9 ft) from focal plane (

0 89) at all

zoom positions

Diaphragm blades

Diaphragm

Aperture range

Metering

Filter-attachment size

Dimensions

Weight

7 (rounded diaphragm opening)

Fully automatic

• 18 mm focal length: f/3.5–22

• 55 mm focal length: f/5.6–38

The minimum aperture displayed may vary depending on the size of the exposure increment selected with the camera.

Full aperture

55 mm (P = 0.75 mm)

Approx. 64.5 mm maximum diameter ×

62.5 mm (distance from camera lens mount flange)

• AF-P DX NIKKOR 18–55mm f/3.5–5.6G VR: Approx.

205 g (7.3 oz)

• AF-P DX NIKKOR 18–55mm f/3.5–5.6G: Approx.

195 g (6.9 oz)

382 Technical Notes

AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–55mm f/3.5–5.6G VR II

This retractable lens, for use exclusively with DX format Nikon digital SLR cameras, is the lens generally used in this manual for illustrative purposes. The parts of the lens are listed below.

Focal length mark

Lens mounting mark

(

0 29)

Focal length scale

Retractable lens barrel

button (

0 30)

CPU contacts (

0 315)

Rear lens cap

A-M mode switch (

0 37, 88)

Lens cap

Focus ring (

0 88, 165)

Vibration reduction ON/OFF

switch (

0 384)

Zoom ring (

0 39)

❚❚ Focus

Focus mode is determined by the camera focus mode and the

position of the lens A-M mode switch (

0 78, 88).

Technical Notes

383

❚❚ Using the Built-in Flash

When using the built-in flash, be sure the subject is at a range of at least 0.6 m (2 ft) and remove lens hoods to prevent vignetting

(shadows created where the end of the lens obscures the built-in flash).

Shadow Vignetting

❚❚ Vibration Reduction (VR)

Vibration reduction can be enabled by sliding the vibration reduction switch to ON and takes effect whenever the shutter-release button is pressed halfway. Vibration reduction reduces blur caused by camera shake, allowing shutter speeds up to 4.0 stops slower than would otherwise be the case (as measured at

55 mm with a DX-format camera according to Camera and

Imaging Products Association [CIPA] standards; effects vary with the photographer and shooting conditions). This increases the range of shutter speeds available.

384 Technical Notes

D

Vibration Reduction

When using vibration reduction, press the shutter-release button halfway and wait for the image in the viewfinder to stabilize before pressing the shutter-release button the rest of the way down.

When vibration reduction is active, the image in the viewfinder may jiggle after the shutter is released. This does not indicate a malfunction.

When the camera is panned, vibration reduction applies only to motion that is not part of the pan (if the camera is panned horizontally, for example, vibration reduction will be applied only to vertical shake), making it much easier to pan the camera smoothly in a wide arc.

Do not turn the camera off or remove the lens while vibration reduction is in effect.

If the camera is equipped with a built-in flash, vibration reduction will be disabled while the flash charges.

Select OFF when the camera is mounted on a tripod unless the tripod head is unsecured or the camera is mounted on a monopod, in which case ON is recommended.

Technical Notes

385

❚❚ Supplied Accessories

52 mm snap-on Front Lens Cap LC-52

Rear Lens Cap

❚❚ Compatible Accessories

52 mm screw-on filters

Rear Lens Cap LF-4

Flexible Lens Pouch CL-0815

Bayonet Hood HB-69

Align the lens hood mounting mark (

●) with the lens hood alignment mark ( ) as shown in Figure q and then rotate the hood (w) until the

● mark is aligned with the lens hood lock mark (—).

When attaching or removing the hood, hold it near the symbol on its base and avoid gripping it too tightly.

Vignetting may occur if the hood is not correctly attached.

The hood can be reversed and mounted on the lens when not in use.

386 Technical Notes

❚❚ Specifications

Type

Focal length

Maximum aperture

Lens construction

Type G AF-S DX lens with built-in CPU and F mount

18–55 mm f/3.5–5.6

Angle of view

Focal length scale

Distance information

Zoom

11 elements in 8 groups (including 1 aspherical lens element)

76 °–28 ° 50 ´

Graduated in millimeters (18, 24, 35, 45, 55)

Output to camera

Manual zoom using independent zoom ring

Focusing

Autofocus controlled by Silent Wave Motor and separate focus ring for manual focus

Lens shift using voice coil motors (VCMs)

Vibration reduction

Minimum focus distance

• AF: 0.28 m (0.92 ft) from focal plane (

0 89) at

all zoom positions

• MF: 0.25 m (0.82 ft) from focal plane at all zoom positions

Diaphragm blades

Diaphragm

Aperture range

7 (rounded diaphragm opening)

Fully automatic

• 18 mm focal length: f/3.5–22

• 55 mm focal length: f/5.6–38

The minimum aperture displayed may vary

Metering

Filter-attachment size

Dimensions

Weight

depending on the size of the exposure increment selected with the camera.

Full aperture

52 mm (P=0.75 mm)

Approx. 66 mm diameter × 59.5 mm (distance from camera lens mount flange when lens is retracted)

Approx. 195 g (6.9 oz)

Technical Notes

387

AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–140mm f/3.5–5.6G ED VR

This lens is for use exclusively with DX format Nikon digital camera. The parts of the lens are listed below.

Focal length mark

Focal length scale

Lens cap

Lens mounting mark

(

0 29)

CPU contacts

(

0 315)

Rear lens cap

A-M mode switch (

0 37, 88)

Zoom ring (

0 39)

Focus ring (

0 88, 165)

Vibration reduction ON/OFF switch (

0 390)

❚❚ Focus

Focus mode is determined by the camera focus mode and the position of the lens A-M mode switch (

0 78, 88).

A

Focusing with AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–140mm f/3.5–5.6G ED VR Lenses

When single-servo AF (AF-S) is selected as the camera focus mode and the lens A-M switch is set to A, focus can be adjusted by keeping the shutter-release button pressed halfway after the autofocus operation is complete and manually rotating the focus ring. To refocus using autofocus, press the shutter-release button halfway again.

388 Technical Notes

❚❚ Using the Built-in Flash

When using the built-in flash, be sure the subject is at a range of at least 0.6 m (2 ft) and remove lens hoods to prevent vignetting

(shadows created where the end of the lens obscures the built-in flash).

Shadow

Camera

D7100/D7000/D300 series/

D200/D100

D90/D80/D50

D5500/D5300/D5200/D5100/

D5000/D3300/D3200/D3100/

D3000/D70 series/D60/

D40 series

Zoom position

18 mm

24–140 mm

18 mm

24 mm

35–140 mm

18 mm

24 mm

35–140 mm

Vignetting

Minimum distance without vignetting

1.0 m/3 ft 3 in.

No vignetting

2.5 m/8 ft 2 in.

1.0 m/3 ft 3 in.

No vignetting

1.0 m/3 ft 3 in.

No vignetting

Technical Notes

389

❚❚ Vibration Reduction (VR)

Vibration reduction can be enabled by sliding the vibration reduction switch to ON and takes effect whenever the shutter-release button is pressed halfway. Vibration reduction reduces blur caused by camera shake, allowing shutter speeds up to 4.0 stops slower than would otherwise be the case (as measured at

140 mm with a D300s camera according to Camera and Imaging

Products Association [CIPA] standards; effects vary with the photographer and shooting conditions). This increases the range of shutter speeds available.

D

Vibration Reduction

When using vibration reduction, press the shutter-release button halfway and wait for the image in the viewfinder to stabilize before pressing the shutter-release button the rest of the way down.

When vibration reduction is active, the image in the viewfinder may jiggle after the shutter is released. This does not indicate a malfunction.

When the camera is panned, vibration reduction applies only to motion that is not part of the pan (if the camera is panned horizontally, for example, vibration reduction will be applied only to vertical shake), making it much easier to pan the camera smoothly in a wide arc.

Do not turn the camera off or remove the lens while vibration reduction is in effect. If power to the lens is cut while vibration reduction is on, the lens may rattle when shaken. This is not a malfunction, and can be corrected by reattaching the lens and turning the camera on.

If the camera is equipped with a built-in flash, vibration reduction will be disabled while the flash charges.

Select OFF when the camera is mounted on a tripod unless the tripod head is unsecured or the camera is mounted on a monopod, in which case ON is recommended.

390 Technical Notes

❚❚ Supplied Accessories

67 mm snap-on Front Lens Cap LC-67

Rear Lens Cap

❚❚ Compatible Accessories

67 mm screw-on filters

Rear Lens Cap LF-4

Flexible Lens Pouch CL-1018

Bayonet Hood HB-32

Align the lens hood mounting mark (

●) with the lens hood alignment mark ( ) as shown in Figure q and then rotate the hood (w) until the

● mark is aligned with the lens hood lock mark (—).

When attaching or removing the hood, hold it near the symbol on its base and avoid gripping it too tightly.

Vignetting may occur if the hood is not correctly attached.

The hood can be reversed and mounted on the lens when not in use.

Technical Notes

391

❚❚ Specifications

Type

Focal length

Maximum aperture

Lens construction

Type G AF-S DX lens with built-in CPU and F mount

18–140 mm f/3.5–5.6

Angle of view

Focal length scale

Distance information

Zoom

17 elements in 12 groups (including 1 ED lens element, 1 aspherical lens element)

76° – 11° 30 ´

Graduated in millimeters (18, 24, 35, 50, 70, 140)

Output to camera

Manual zoom using independent zoom ring

Focusing

Nikon Internal Focusing (IF) System with autofocus controlled by Silent Wave Motor and

Vibration reduction

separate focus ring for manual focus

Lens shift using voice coil motors (VCMs)

Minimum focus distance

0.45 m (1.48 ft) from focal plane (

0 89) at all

zoom positions

Diaphragm blades

Diaphragm

Aperture range

Metering

Filter-attachment size

Dimensions

Weight

7 (rounded diaphragm opening)

Fully automatic

• 18 mm focal length: f/3.5–22

• 140 mm focal length: f/5.6–38

The minimum aperture displayed may vary depending on the size of the exposure increment selected with the camera.

Full aperture

67 mm (P = 0.75 mm)

Approx. 78 mm maximum diameter × 97 mm

(distance from camera lens mount flange)

Approx. 490 g (17.3 oz)

392 Technical Notes

AF-S DX NIKKOR 55–200mm f/4–5.6G ED VR II

This retractable lens is for use exclusively with DX format Nikon digital camera. The parts of the lens are listed below.

Focal length scale

Retractable lens barrel

button (

0 30)

Focal length mark

Lens mounting mark

(

0 29)

CPU contacts

(

0 315)

Rear lens cap

Lens cap

Focus ring (

0 88, 165)

A-M mode switch (

0 37, 88)

Vibration reduction

ON/OFF switch (

0 394)

Zoom ring (

0 39)

❚❚ Focus

Focus mode is determined by the camera focus mode and the

position of the lens A-M mode switch (

0 78, 88).

❚❚ Using the Built-in Flash

When using the built-in flash, be sure the subject is at a range of at least 0.6 m (2 ft) and remove lens hoods to prevent vignetting

(shadows created where the end of the lens obscures the built-in flash).

Shadow Vignetting

Technical Notes

393

❚❚ Vibration Reduction (VR)

Vibration reduction can be enabled by sliding the vibration reduction switch to ON and takes effect whenever the shutter-release button is pressed halfway. Vibration reduction reduces blur caused by camera shake, allowing shutter speeds up to 4.0 stops slower than would otherwise be the case and increasing the range of shutter speeds available. The effects of VR on shutter speed are measured according to Camera and Imaging

Products Association (CIPA) standards; FX-format lenses are measured using FX-format digital cameras, DX-format lenses using DX-format cameras. Zoom lenses are measured at maximum zoom.

D

Vibration Reduction

When using vibration reduction, press the shutter-release button halfway and wait for the image in the viewfinder to stabilize before pressing the shutter-release button the rest of the way down.

When vibration reduction is active, the image in the viewfinder may jiggle after the shutter is released. This does not indicate a malfunction.

When the camera is panned, vibration reduction applies only to motion that is not part of the pan (if the camera is panned horizontally, for example, vibration reduction will be applied only to vertical shake), making it much easier to pan the camera smoothly in a wide arc.

Do not turn the camera off or remove the lens while vibration reduction is in effect.

If the camera is equipped with a built-in flash, vibration reduction will be disabled while the flash charges.

Select OFF when the camera is mounted on a tripod unless the tripod head is unsecured or the camera is mounted on a monopod, in which case ON is recommended.

394 Technical Notes

❚❚ Supplied Accessories

52mm snap-on Front Lens Cap LC-52

Rear Lens Cap

❚❚ Compatible Accessories

52 mm screw-on filters

Rear Lens Cap LF-4

Flexible Lens Pouch CL-0915

Bayonet Hood HB-37

Align the lens hood mounting mark (

●) with the lens hood alignment mark ( ) as shown in Figure q and then rotate the hood (w) until the

● mark is aligned with the lens hood lock mark (—).

When attaching or removing the hood, hold it near the symbol on its base and avoid gripping it too tightly.

Vignetting may occur if the hood is not correctly attached.

The hood can be reversed and mounted on the lens when not in use. When the hood is reversed, it can be attached and removed by rotating it while holding it near the lock mark

(—).

Technical Notes

395

❚❚ Specifications

Type

Focal length

Maximum aperture

Lens construction

Type G AF-S DX lens with built-in CPU and F mount

55–200 mm f/4–5.6

Angle of view

Focal length scale

13 elements in 9 groups (including 1 ED lens element)

28° 50 ´ – 8°

Graduated in millimeters (55, 70, 85, 105, 135,

200)

Output to camera

Manual zoom using independent zoom ring

Distance information

Zoom

Focusing

Nikon Internal Focusing (IF) System with autofocus controlled by Silent Wave Motor and separate focus ring for manual focus

Vibration reduction

Lens shift using voice coil motors (VCMs)

Minimum focus distance

1.1 m (3.7 ft) from focal plane (

0 89) at all zoom

positions

Diaphragm blades

Diaphragm

Aperture range

7 (rounded diaphragm opening)

Fully automatic

• 55 mm focal length: f/4–22

• 200 mm focal length: f/5.6–32

Metering

Filter-attachment size

Dimensions

Weight

Full aperture

52 mm (P = 0.75 mm)

Approx. 70.5 mm maximum diameter × 83 mm

(distance from camera lens mount flange when lens is retracted)

Approx. 300 g (10.6 oz)

396 Technical Notes

D

Lens Care

Keep the CPU contacts clean.

Use a blower to remove dust and lint from the lens surfaces. To remove smudges and fingerprints, apply a small amount of ethanol or lens cleaner to a soft, clean cotton cloth or lens-cleaning tissue and clean from the center outwards using a circular motion, taking care not to leave smears or touch the glass with your fingers.

Never use organic solvents such as paint thinner or benzene to clean the lens.

The lens hood or NC filters can be used to protect the front lens element.

Attach the front and rear caps before placing the lens in its flexible pouch.

When a lens hood is attached, do not pick up or hold the lens or camera using only the hood.

If the lens will not be used for an extended period, store it in a cool, dry location to prevent mold and rust. Do not store in direct sunlight or with naphtha or camphor moth balls.

Keep the lens dry. Rusting of the internal mechanism can cause irreparable damage.

Leaving the lens in extremely hot locations could damage or warp parts made from reinforced plastic.

Technical Notes

397

A

A Note on Wide- and Super Wide-Angle Lenses

Autofocus may not provide the desired results in situations like those shown below.

1 Objects in the background occupy more of the focus point than the main subject:

If the focus point contains both foreground and background objects, the camera may focus on the background and the subject may be out of focus.

Example

: A far-off portrait subject at some distance from the background

2 The subject contains many fine details.

The camera may have difficulty focusing on subjects that lack contrast or appear smaller than objects in the background.

Example

: A field of flowers

In these cases, use manual focus, or use focus lock to focus on another subject at the same distance and then recompose the photograph. For more information, see “Getting Good Results with Autofocus” (

0 80).

398 Technical Notes

Memory Card Capacity

The following table shows the approximate number of pictures that can be stored on a 16 GB SanDisk Extreme Pro 95 MB/s

SDHC UHS-I card at different image quality and size settings.

Image quality Image size File size

1

No. of images

1

Buffer capacity

2

NEF (RAW),

Compressed, 14-bit

NEF (RAW),

Compressed, 12-bit

428

511

10

14

JPEG fine

JPEG normal

JPEG basic

Large

Medium

Small

Large

Medium

Small

Large

Medium

Small

12.3 MB

7.9 MB

3.9 MB

6.1 MB

3.9 MB

2.1 MB

2.0 MB

1.5 MB

1.0 MB

929

1500

2900

1800

3000

5600

3500

5700

10300

1 All figures are approximate. Results will vary with card type, camera settings, and scene recorded.

2 Maximum number of exposures that can be stored in memory buffer at ISO 100. Drops when long exposure noise reduction (

0 243), auto distortion control (0 245), or Date stamp

(

0 256) is on.

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

Technical Notes

399

Battery Life

The movie footage or number of shots that can be recorded with fully-charged batteries varies with the condition of the battery, temperature, the interval between shots, and the length of time menus are displayed. Sample figures for EN-EL14a (1230 mAh) batteries are given below.

• Photographs, single-frame release mode (CIPA standard

1

)

:

Approximately 820 shots

• Photographs, continuous release mode (Nikon standard

2

)

:

Approximately 3110 shots

• Movies: Approximately 65 minutes at 1080/60p and 1080/50p

3

1 Measured at 23 °C/73.4 °F (±2 °C/3.6 °F) with an AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–55mm f/3.5–5.6G VR II lens under the following test conditions: lens cycled from infinity to minimum range and one photograph taken at default settings once every 30 s; after photograph is taken, monitor is turned on; tester waits for monitor to turn off; flash fired at full power once every other shot. Live view not used.

2 Measured at 20 °C/68 °F with an AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–55mm f/3.5–5.6G VR II lens under the following test conditions: vibration reduction off, continuous high-speed release mode, focus mode set to AF-C, image quality set to JPEG basic, image size set to M (medium), white balance set to Auto, ISO sensitivity set to ISO 100, shutter speed

1

/

250 s, focus cycled from infinity to minimum range three times after shutter-release button has been pressed halfway for 3 s; six shots are then taken in succession and monitor turned on; cycle repeated once monitor has turned off.

3 Measured at 23°C/73.4°F (±2 °C/3.6 °F) with the camera at default settings and an AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–55mm f/3.5–5.6G VR II lens under conditions specified by the Camera and Imaging Products Association (CIPA). Individual movies can be up to 20 minutes in length or 4 GB in size; recording may end before these limits are reached if the camera temperature rises.

400 Technical Notes

The following can reduce battery life:

Using the monitor

Keeping the shutter-release button pressed halfway

Repeated autofocus operations

Taking NEF (RAW) photographs

Slow shutter speeds

Using the built-in Wi-Fi function or using an optional GP-1 or

GP-1A GPS unit or WR-R10/WR-1 wireless remote controller

Using an Eye-Fi card

Using VR (vibration reduction) mode with VR lenses

Repeatedly zooming in and out with an AF-P lens.

To ensure that you get the most from rechargeable Nikon

EN-EL14a batteries:

Keep the battery contacts clean. Soiled contacts can reduce battery performance.

Use batteries immediately after charging. Batteries will lose their charge if left unused.

Technical Notes

401

Index

Symbols

i (Auto mode) ............................... 4, 38 j (Auto (flash off) mode)............ 4, 38

h (Scene)................................... 4, 54

k (Portrait) ............................................55

l (Landscape)......................................55

p (Child).................................................55

m (Sports)...............................................56

n (Close up)..........................................56

o (Night portrait)................................56

r (Night landscape)...........................57

s (Party/indoor)..................................57

t (Beach/snow)...................................57

u (Sunset)..............................................58

v (Dusk/dawn) ....................................58

w (Pet portrait) ....................................58

x (Candlelight)......................................59

y (Blossom)...........................................59

z (Autumn colors)..............................59

0 (Food) ..................................................60

q (Special effects) .................. 4, 61

% (Night vision) ...................................61

S (Super vivid) .....................................62

T (Pop) ..................................................62

U (Photo illustration)..................62, 66

' (Toy camera effect) .................63, 67

( (Miniature effect) ....................63, 68

3 (Selective color) .......................63, 69

1 (Silhouette).......................................64

2 (High key)..........................................64

3 (Low key)...........................................64

P

(Programmed auto) ........4, 113, 115

S

(Shutter-priority auto) ....4, 113, 117

A

(Aperture-priority auto).4, 113, 118

M

(Manual) .............................4, 113, 119

U (flexible program) ........................ 116

8 (Single frame) .................................71

! (Continuous L)...................... 71, 72

9 (Continuous H) ..................... 71, 72

E (Self-timer) ................................ 71, 75

" (Delayed remote (ML-L3))71, 107

# (Quick-response remote (ML-L3)) ...

71, 107

J (Quiet shutter release) ......... 71, 74

c (Single-point AF).......................... 82 d (Dynamic-area AF)....................... 82

e (Auto-area AF)............................... 83

f (3D-tracking) .......................... 83, 84

6 (Face-priority AF)................166, 167

7 (Wide-area AF) .....................166, 167

8 (Normal-area AF) ................166, 167

9 (Subject-tracking AF) ......166, 167

L (Matrix metering) ........................125

M (Center-weighted metering)...125

N (Spot metering)............................125

o (auto flash)................................ 94

j (red-eye reduction).............. 94, 96 p (slow sync)......................... 94, 96 q (rear-curtain sync) ................. 96

Y (Flash compensation)...............131

E (Exposure compensation) ........129

e (AE bracketing) ....................148

f (WB bracketing) .................148

g (ADL bracketing) ...............148

d (Help) ................................................. 14

m (White balance) ...........................137

L (Preset manual)..........................142

I (focus indicator)............... 40, 86, 89

N (flash-ready indicator) .... 5, 44, 328

a (live view)................45, 50, 162, 174

P button........................................10, 189

t (Memory buffer).....................73, 399

402 Technical Notes

Numerics

2016-pixel RGB sensor 260, 315, 366,

368

3D color matrix metering.............. 315

3D-tracking (AF-area mode).....83, 84

A

A/V cable ............................................. 220

AC adapter.................................330, 335

Access lamp...........................................41

Accessories ......................................... 330

Accessory terminal .......................... 282

Accessory terminal accessories... 333

Active D-Lighting ............................. 133

Add items (My Menu) ..................... 310

ADL bracketing (Auto bracketing set)

148

Adobe RGB.......................................... 243

AE bracketing (Auto bracketing set).

148

AE lock.................................................. 127

AE-L ....................................................... 127

AE-L/AF-L

button..................87, 127, 267

AF ................................... 78–87, 164–167

AF area brackets ...........................33, 40

AF-A..........................................................78

AF-area mode ............................. 82, 166

AF-assist illuminator........81, 250, 318

AF-C................................................ 78, 248

AF-F ....................................................... 164

AF-S ................................................ 78, 164

A-M mode switch ... 88, 383, 388, 393

Angle of view..................................... 322

Aperture ........................... 114, 118, 120

Aperture-priority auto.................... 118

Assign AE-L/AF-L button ............... 267

Assign Fn button .............................. 265

Assign touch Fn ................................ 268

Auto (White balance) ...................... 137

Auto bracketing.......................148, 264

Auto distortion control...................245

Auto flash............................................... 94

Auto image rotation ........................235

Auto info display...............................278

Auto ISO sensitivity control ..........241

Auto off timers...................................253

Auto-area AF (AF-area mode) ........ 83

Autoexposure lock ...........................127

Autofocus ....................78–87, 164–167

Auto-servo AF ...................................... 78

Available settings .............................348

B

Battery ................................. 27, 330, 373

Beep options ......................................276

Black-and-white ................................299

Body cap ......................................... 1, 332

Border (PictBridge)...........................215

Bracketing ................................. 148, 264

Built-in AF-assist illuminator.81, 250,

318

Built-in flash .................................93, 320

Bulb........................................................121

Burst......................................................... 72

C

Calendar playback............................191

Camera Control Pro 2......................332

Capture NX-D .....................................210

CEC.........................................................223

Center-weighted metering ...........125

Charger................................ 27, 330, 373

Choose start/end point ..................183

Clean image sensor..........................338

Clock...............................................32, 275

Clock battery ........................................ 33

Cloudy (White balance) ..................137

CLS .........................................................323

Color outline.......................................302

Color sketch ........................................303

Color space .........................................243

Technical Notes

403

Color temperature ........................... 139

Commander mode .......................... 260

Compatible lenses ........................... 314

Conformity marking............... 285, 375

Continuous (Release mode)..... 71, 72

Continuous-servo AF ............... 78, 248

Copyright ................................... 197, 274

CPU contacts...................................... 315

CPU lens............................................... 314

Creative Lighting System .............. 323

Cropping (PictBridge)..................... 215

Cross screen (Filter effects)........... 298

Custom Settings ............................... 246

Cyanotype .......................................... 299

D

Date and time............................. 32, 275

Date counter............................. 256, 257

Date format ................................. 32, 275

Date stamp ......................................... 256

Daylight saving time................ 32, 275

DCF version 2.0 ................................. 374

Delayed remote (ML-L3)......... 71, 107

Delete ................................................... 205

Delete all images.............................. 206

Delete current image...................... 205

Delete selected images.................. 206

Device control (HDMI).................... 223

Digital Print Order Format .. 216, 218,

374

Diopter adjustment control .. 33, 331

Direct sunlight (White balance) .. 137

Distortion control.................... 245, 296

D-Lighting........................................... 294

DPOF...................................216, 218, 374

DPOF print order .............................. 218

Dynamic-area AF.................................82

E

Edit movie.................................. 183, 186

Electronic rangefinder............. 89, 250

404 Technical Notes

EV steps for exposure cntrl............ 252

Exif version 2.3...................................374

Exposure ..................114, 125, 127, 129

Exposure bracketing ....................... 148

Exposure compensation ................ 129

Exposure delay mode .....................254

Exposure indicator ..................120, 169

Exposure lock..................................... 127

Exposure meters ................................. 44

Exposure mode ................................. 113

External microphone..............180, 333

Eye sensor ...................................... 9, 278

Eye-Fi upload ..................................... 284

F

Face-priority AF................................. 166

File information................................. 193

File naming .........................................240

File number sequence .................... 255

Filter effects ..................... 155, 157, 298

Filters..................................................... 330

Fine-tuning white balance............ 140

Firmware version .............................. 285

Fisheye.................................................. 297

Flash ........................................ 44, 93, 323

Flash (White balance)......................137

Flash cntrl for built-in flash ........... 259

Flash compensation ........................ 131

Flash control....................................... 260

Flash mode .................................... 94, 96

Flash range............................................ 98

Flash ready indicator........... 5, 44, 328

Flash sync speed........................ 98, 365

Flat (Set Picture Control)................ 152

Flexible program .............................. 116

Flicker reduction ......................176, 281

Fluorescent (White balance)137, 138

Fn

button.............................................. 265

f-number.....................................114, 118

Focal length........................................ 322

Focal length scale.377, 383, 388, 393

Focal plane mark .................................89

Focus............................. 78–89, 164–167

Focus indicator.......................40, 86, 89

Focus lock ..............................................86

Focus mode................................. 78, 164

Focus point...40, 82, 86, 89, 166, 167,

249

Focusing screen................................ 365

Focusing the viewfinder ...................33

Focus-mode switch .....................37, 88

Format.................................................. 272

Format memory card ...................... 272

Frame interval (Slide show) .......... 209

Frame size/frame rate..................... 177

Framing grid .............................170, 256

Front-curtain sync...............................96

Full-frame playback......................... 188

Full-time-servo AF............................ 164

G

GPS unit ............................................... 283

H

I

H.264..................................................... 370

HDMI ............................................222, 374

HDMI-CEC............................................ 223

HDR (high dynamic range) ........... 135

Help..........................................................14

High definition .........................222, 374

High Dynamic Range (HDR) ......... 135

High ISO NR ........................................ 244

High-angle shots ................................... 6

Highlights...................................193, 234

Histogram ..................................194, 234

Image comment ............................... 273

Image Dust Off ref photo .............. 279

Image overlay .................................... 300

Image quality........................................90

Image review ..................................... 234

J

Image size.............................................. 92

Incandescent (White balance) .....137

Info display auto off.................... 9, 278

Info display format ...........................277

In-focus indicator.................. 40, 86, 89

Information display..................... 8, 277

Infrared receiver ................................108

Interval timer shooting...................101

ISO display...........................................252

ISO sensitivity..............................99, 241

i-TTL ............................................. 259, 260

i-TTL balanced fill-flash for digital

SLR........................................................260

JPEG ......................................................... 90

JPEG basic.............................................. 90

JPEG fine ................................................ 90

JPEG normal.......................................... 90

L

Landscape (Set Picture Control)..152

Language......................................32, 275

Large (Image size)............................... 92

Lens........... 29, 314, 377, 383, 388, 393

Lens focus ring88, 377, 383, 388, 393

Lens mount .......................................1, 89

Lens vibration reduction switch... 37,

384, 390, 394

Live view ...................... 45, 50, 162, 174

Location data ........................... 199, 283

Lock mirror up for cleaning...........340

Long exposure NR ............................243

Low-angle shots.....................................6

M

Manage Picture Control .................158

Manual...........................................88, 119

Manual focus ..................... 88, 164, 165

Manual movie settings ...................179

Matrix metering.................................125

Technical Notes

405

Maximum aperture.............................89

Maximum sensitivity....................... 241

Medium (Image size) .........................92

Memory buffer .....................................73

Memory card.............28, 272, 334, 399

Memory card capacity.................... 399

Metering.............................................. 125

Microphone........................................ 178

Miniature effect ......................... 68, 304

Minimum shutter speed................ 241

Mired .................................................... 141

Mirror................................................ 1, 340

Mode dial ................................................. 4

Monitor ......................... 6, 162, 188, 276

Monitor brightness.......................... 276

Monochrome..................................... 299

Monochrome (Set Picture Control) ...

152

Mounting mark29, 377, 383, 388, 393

Movie quality..................................... 177

Movie settings................................... 177

Movie-record button ............... 51, 175

Movies........................................... 50, 174

My Menu ............................................. 310

N

NEF (RAW)........................... 90, 240, 289

NEF (RAW) processing .................... 289

NEF (RAW) recording ...................... 240

Network connection ....................... 226

Neutral (Set Picture Control)........ 152

Nikon Transfer 2 ............................... 212

No. of copies (PictBridge).............. 215

Non-CPU lens..................................... 316

Normal-area AF................................. 166

Number of focus points................. 249

Number of shots............................... 400

O

Optional flash .................................... 323

Output resolution (HDMI)............. 223

406 Technical Notes

Overview data.................................... 198

P

Page size (PictBridge)......................215

Painting................................................307

Perspective control.......................... 297

Photo Illustration....................... 66, 303

Photo information...................192, 234

PictBridge ...................................214, 374

Picture Controls........................152, 154

PIN-entry WPS.................................... 228

Playback...............................................188

Playback display options ...............234

Playback folder..................................234

Playback information .............192, 234

Playback menu ..................................233

Playback zoom ..................................200

Portrait (Set Picture Control) ........152

Power connector .....................330, 335

Power switch........................................ 31

Preset manual (White balance) .. 137,

142

Press the shutter-release button all

the way down .................................... 41

Press the shutter-release button

halfway .......................................... 40, 41

Print (DPOF)...............................216, 219

Print date (PictBridge).....................215

Print select ..........................................216

Printing.................................................214

Programmed auto............................115

Protecting photographs ................ 202

Push-button WPS .............................226

Q

Quick retouch .................................... 295

Quick-response remote (ML-L3) .. 71,

107

Quiet shutter release.................. 71, 74

R

Rangefinder........................................ 250

Rank items (My Menu).................... 313

Rating ..........................................203, 209

Rear-curtain sync.................................96

Recent settings.................................. 309

Red-eye correction .......................... 295

Red-eye reduction .......................94, 96

Release mode .......................................71

Remote control ........................107, 332

Remote cord..............................121, 333

Remote on duration (ML-L3)........ 254

Remote shutter release.................. 282

Remove items (My Menu) ............. 312

Reset .................................. 110, 237, 248

Reset custom settings .................... 248

Reset shooting menu...................... 237

Resize.................................................... 292

Retouch menu................................... 286

Retractable lens barrel button.30, 37

Reverse dial rotation ....................... 269

Reverse indicators............................ 258

RGB ...............................................194, 243

RGB histogram .................................. 194

Rotate tall............................................ 235

S

Save selected frame ........................ 186

Scene auto selector ............................47

Scene mode ..........................................54

Select to send to smart device .... 231

Selective color ............................ 69, 305

Self-portrait ............................................. 6

Self-timer............................... 71, 75, 254

Sensitivity..................................... 99, 241

Sepia ..................................................... 299

Set clock from satellite ................... 283

Set Picture Control........................... 154

Setup menu........................................ 270

Shade (White balance) ................... 137

Shooting data ....................................196

Shooting menu..................................236

Shutter-priority auto........................117

Shutter-release button ....41, 86, 127,

252

Shutter-release button AE-L .........252

Side-by-side comparison ...............307

Single frame (Release mode).......... 71

Single-point AF (AF-area mode).... 82

Single-servo AF...........................78, 164

Size........................................ 92, 177, 291

Skylight (Filter effects) ....................298

Slide show ...........................................208

Slot empty release lock...................281

Slow sync ........................................ 94, 96

Small (Image size)............................... 92

Soft (Filter effects) ............................298

Special effects mode ......................... 61

Speedlight ...........................................323

Spot metering....................................125

sRGB.......................................................243

SSID........................................................229

Standard (Set Picture Control) .....152

Standard i-TTL fill-flash for digital

SLR.............................................. 260, 325

Standby timer ................... 44, 253, 283

Start printing (PictBridge).... 216, 217

Storage folder ....................................238

Straighten............................................296

Subject-tracking AF .........................166

T

Television.............................................220

Thumbnail playback ........................190

Time.......................................................121

Time zone .....................................32, 275

Time zone and date .........................275

Timer ..............................................75, 101

Toning......................................... 155, 157

Touch controls......................... 157, 276

Touch screen ........................................ 17

Technical Notes

407

Touch Shutter.......................................21

Trim ....................................................... 291

Trimming movies ............................. 183

Type D lens......................................... 315

Type E lens.......................................... 315

Type G lens ......................................... 315

U

USB cable ............................................ 211

UTC............................................... 199, 283

V

Vari-angle monitor ............................... 6

Vibration reduction37, 379, 384, 390,

394

Video mode............................... 221, 281

View SSID ............................................ 229

Viewfinder ............................... 5, 33, 365

Viewfinder eyepiece cap ..................76

Viewfinder grid display .................. 256

ViewNX 2.................................... 210, 211

Vignette control ............................... 244

Vivid (Set Picture Control)............. 152

Volume........................................ 182, 208

W

Warm filter (Filter effects).............. 298

WB.......................................................... 137

WB bracketing (Auto bracketing set)

148

White balance ................................... 137

Wide-area AF ..................................... 166

Wi-Fi ................................................xx, 224

Wind noise reduction ..................... 178

Wireless..........................................xx, 224

Wireless Mobile Utility........... 224, 225

Wireless remote controller . 109, 282,

333

408 Technical Notes

409

410

No reproduction in any form of this manual, in whole or in part (except for brief quotation in critical articles or reviews), may be made without written authorization from NIKON CORPORATION.

SB5K02(11)

6MB25711-02

Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement

Table of contents